SWITCHES & CONTROLS Rocker, Toggle, Pushbutton & Rotary CATALOG • Rocker • Toggle • Pushbutton • Rotary CIRCUIT PROTECTION • Hydraulic-Magnetic • Thermal • GFCI / ELCI CUSTOM SOLUTIONS • PDU’s • Keypads • Control Modules STRATEGIC MARKETS SERVED: On/Off Highway Marine Telecom/Datacom Military Renewable Energy GLOBAL LOCATIONS: ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 ISO14001:2004 ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 ISO14001:2004 ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 ISO14001:2004 ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGES + Vertical Integration ii Reliable & On-Time Delivery Excellent Customer Service MULTIPLEXED POWER SYSTEMS • HMI Devices & I/O Modules • Programmable Displays • Data Communication Interfaces • Electrical Systems Monitoring ..................................................................................................................... SWITCHES & CONTROLS ................... Since its founding, Carling Technologies has continually forged a tradition of leadership in quality and product innovation. ................... 1920 There are few products that Carling Technologies hasn’t turned “ON” and fewer industries that haven’t turned to Carling for solutions. With ISO and TS registered manufacturing facilities and technical sales offices worldwide, Carling ranks among the world’s largest manufacturers of circuit breakers, switches, power distribution units, digital switching systems and electronic controls. ................... FOUNDED IN Innovative & Eco-Friendly Products OTHER SERVED INDUSTRIES: Medical Industrial Control Audio / Visual Commercial Food HVAC Floor Care Generators Small Appliances Security Systems Test & Measurment WORLDWIDE NUMBERS: 2000+ 150+ EMPLOYEES ENGINEERS 70 + 50+ DISTRIBUTORS REP FIRMS www.carlingtech.com Table of Contents Page Product Selector Guide .................................................... 2 Full-Sized Rocker Switches Tippette Switches .................................................................5 TIL/TIG-Series Non-Illuminated, 1P/2P ........................... 6 TIH/TII-Series Non-Illuminated, 3P/4P...............................6 Illuminated, 1P ......................................... 6 LTIL-Series LTIG/LTIH-Series Illuminated, 2P/3P ................................... 6 Tippette Rocker and Bracket Styles ................................... 7 Tippette Actuator Styles ...................................................... 8 Tippette Mounting Bracket Styles ...................................... 9 Softspot® Illuminated, 1P ......................... 10 LS-Series Bezel-less ................................................ 12 S-Series Mid-Sized Rocker Switches T-Series Mini-Tippette®, Non-Illuminated, 1P ....... 16 Mini-Tippette®, Illuminated, 1P .............. 18 LTA-Series TG/LTG-Series 1P or 2P ............................................. 20 2 Independent Switches, 2P ..................... 22 TTG-Series Adjacent Indicator Light, 1P ................... 24 TLG-Series Circuit Designation Chart .................................................. 26 RR/LRR-Series Round, with or without Illumination, 1P..... 27 Curvette®, Non-Illuminated, 1P............... 29 R/RSC-Series Curvette®, Illuminated, 1P...................... 31 LRA-Series Super Curvette®, Non-Illuminated, 1P/2P.... 33 RG-Series Super Curvette®, Illuminated, 2P.............. 35 LRG-Series Small-Sized Rocker Switches 610/620-Series Non-Illuminated, 1P or 2P ....................... 37 Rocker/Paddle/Visi-Rocker®, 1P/2P ...... 39 611/621-Series With or without Illumination .................... 41 622/632-Series Non-Illuminated, 1P ................................ 43 651/652-Series Sealed Switches V-Series V-Series V-Series V-Series V-Series V-Series VP-Series W-Series L-Series L-Series NEW NEW Rocker Actuator........................................ 45 Paddle Actuator ....................................... 56 Rotary .................................................... 64 V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0.................. 71 Actuators Separately ................................. 75 Accessories ............................................... 76 Illuminated Indicators ................................ 78 Fully Submersible...................................... 81 Rocker Actuator ....................................... 86 Paddle Actuator ....................................... 95 LP-Series ST-Series Page Illuminated Indicators........................... 96 AC/DC, 1P/2P, IP67...........................113 Controls LD-Series Dimmer .................................................... 99 Mirror Rotate ......................................... 102 LMR-Series Washer/Wiper ........................................ 104 LW-Series Addressable............................................. 107 N-Series Standard Legend Imprinting......................................... 159 Toggle Switches LT-Series Illuminated ............................................. 112 1 Pole ..................................................... 114 F-Series 2 Pole ..................................................... 116 G-Series 3 Pole ..................................................... 118 H-Series 4 Pole ..................................................... 118 I-Series Heavy Duty 20 Amp .............................. 120 C-Series Double Insulated all Nylon ....................... 122 D-Series 110/216-Series Quick Make/Break, AC/DC ................ 124 DK/EK-Series Heavy Duty, AC/DC ............................ 126 High Temperature .................................... 128 MAAOA/215 Hexboot Accessories...................................................... 130 Hardware Accessories.................................................... 131 Pushbutton Switches Light Actuation Force .............................. 132 16-3P-Series 170/172-Series High-Amperage, Momentary ................ 134 AC Rated with Metal Cap ...................... 136 P26-Series AC Rated with Plastic Cap ...................... 138 P27-Series 1-3 Pole Maintained for Foot Controls ....... 140 641-Series 110/316P-Series AC/DC for Foot Controls ....................... 143 Metal Construction Heavy Duty ................ 145 P-Series Plastic Construction Heavy Duty ............... 147 PP-Series Hardware Accessories........................................................... 131 Rotary R135-Series 700/800-Series V-Series ON-OFF Repeating Action ..................... 149 Up to 8 Positions ..................................... 151 ................................................................. 64 Miniature Switches ................. See Mini-Switch Catalog Terminology/Agency Approvals ............................ 154 Carling Technologies is the leading manufacturer of switches and controls serving OEMs worldwide. Carling Technologies broad product range offers a full line of rocker, toggle, pushbutton, rotary and mini switches for a wide variety of applications. Featuring cutting edge designs and advanced features, Carling products are well known for their performance and reliability Available Online are tools such as a part configurator, product selectors and stock checks. Please visit www.carlingtech.com for the latest information on all our products. Application Solution Engineers are readily available to assist you in selecting the appropriate product for your application. For further assistance, please email us at [email protected] Custom Design Solutions can be tailor-made for most any application using our extensive engineering resources. Other Products such as miniature switches, hydraulic-magnetic, thermal and ground fault circuit breakers are also available. © 2016 Carling Technologies, Inc. Carling Technologies is a registered trademark of Carling Technologies, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. www.carlingtech.com 1 Product Selector Guide SEALED SWITCHES NEW V-Rotary V-Series W-Series L-Series Poles 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 Ratings up to 15A 12/24VDC up to 15A 24VDC 15A 125VAC 10A 250VAC up to 10A 24VDC up to 15A 125VAC 10A 250VAC 20A 18VDC Sealing / Actuator IP67, rotary knob IP66, rocker, paddle, locking rocker IP68 including connector, bezel-less rocker, paddle & locking rocker IP67, rocker, paddle, locking rocker .830” x 1.450” .830” x 1.450” .830” x 1.450” .867” x 1.734” snap-in mount snap-in mount snap-in mount snap-in mount Mounting Hole Specifications [21.08mm x 36.83mm] [21.08mm x 36.83mm] [21.08mm x 36.83mm] [22mm x 44mm] Termination .250 tabs solder lug wire leads .250 tabs solder lug wire leads .110 tabs .187 tab .250 tabs Illumination incandescent, LED, neon incandescent, LED, neon LED incandescent, LED Approvals pending UL, CSA, VDE n/a n/a FULL-SIZED ROCKERS S-Series Poles MID-SIZED AND SMALL-SIZED ROCKERS TIG / LTIG / TIH / LTIH / TIL / LTIL TII / LS RR / LRR R / LRA / RSC RG / LRG 620 / 621 / 622 632 / 651 T / LTA / TG / LTG / TLG / TTG 1, 2 1, 2, 3, 4 1 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 Ratings up to 10A 28VDC up to 15A 125VAC 10A 250VAC up to 12A 125VAC 10A 250VAC up to 20A 125VAC 15A 250VAC up to 12A 125VAC 10A 250VAC 8A 250VAC 1/2 HP 125250VAC up to 20A 125VAC 10A 250VAC Actuator bezel-less rocker rocker, paddle rocker rocker, paddle rocker, paddle rocker, lever, paddle, plunger, toggle (bat) .830” x 1.450” .795” .480” x 1.072” snap-in mount screw mount round snap-in mount Mounting Hole Specifications .787” x 1.575” snap-in, keyed [21.08mm x 36.83mm] [20.2mm] .550” x 1.125” [12.19mm x 27.23mm] .508” x .756” [22mm x 30mm] snap-in mount [25.4mm x 28.57mm] .866” x 1.182” snap-in mount [12.9mm x 19.2mm] [13.97mm x 28.57mm] 1.00” x 1.125” snap-in mount Termination .110 Tabs .187 tab solder lug .250 tabs screw terms wire leads .187 tab solder lug .250 tabs wire leads PC terms .187 tab solder lug wire leads PC terms .187 tab solder lug .250 tabs wire leads Illumination LED incandescent, neon incandescent, neon incandescent, neon incandescent, LED, neon incandescent, neon Approvals n/a UL, CSA, VDE UL, cUL UL, CSA, VDE UL, CSA, VDE UL, CSA *Options and approvals shown may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specifications without prior notice. 2 www.carlingtech.com Product Selector Guide CONTROLS NEW LD Dimmer LMR Mirror LW Wiper N-Series V-Charger Poles multi-function multi-function multi-function 1 1 Ratings up to 10A 12VDC 5A 24VDC up to 1A 14VDC .5A 28VDC up to 8A 14VDC 4A 28VDC .4VA 28VDC 12V/24VDC Actuator rocker, paddle joystick rocker, paddle rocker, paddle sealed spring-loaded access doors .867” x 1.734” .867” x 1.734” .867” x 1.734” .867” x 1.734” .830” x 1.450” snap-in mount snap-in mount snap-in mount snap-in mount snap-in mount Mounting Hole Specifications [22mm x 44mm] [22mm x 44mm] [22mm x 44mm] [22mm x 44mm] [21.08mm x 36.83mm] Termination .250 tabs wire leads with connector .187 tabs .187 tabs .250 tabs Illumination LED n/a LED LED LED Approvals n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a TOGGLE SWITCHES LT-Series F/G/H/I C/D 110-Series DK / EK MAAOA / 215 Poles 1, 2 1, 2, 3, 4 1 1, 2 1, 2 1 Ratings up to 15A 125VAC 10A 250VAC 15A 12-28VDC up to 20A 125VAC 20A 277VAC 2 HP 250VAC up to 20A 125VAC 10A 250VAC up to 6A 125VAC/DC 3A 250VAC/DC up to 20A 125VAC/DC 10A 250VAC/DC up to 20A 125VAC 10A 250VAC 1/2HP 125250VAC paddle, toggle (bat) toggle (bat), toggle (ball) toggle (bat), toggle (ball) toggle .500” dia .500” dia bushing mount [12.7mm] bushing mount .500” dia [12.7mm] bushing mount Actuator Mounting Hole Specifications Termination Illumination paddle, toggle (bat) paddle, toggle .500” dia .500” dia bushing mount bushing mount [12.7mm] .187 tabs solder lug .250 tabs screw terms wire leads PC terms incandescent, (bat) n/a .656” x 1.218” [16.66mm x 30.54mm] [12.7mm] [12.7mm] .187 tabs solder lug .250 tabs screw terms wire leads PC terms solder lug .250 tabs screw terms wire leads solder lug .250 tabs screw terms wire leads screw terms .250 tabs screw terms wire leads n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a UL, CSA, VDE UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA *Options and approvals shownneon may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. Approvals (bat) snap-in mount *Options and approvals shown may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. www.carlingtech.com 3 Product Selector Guide PUSHBUTTON 16-3P 170 / 172 P26 / P27 641 / 110 P / PP Poles 1 1 1 1, 2, 3 1 Ratings up to 3A 125VAC up to 15A 125VAC 10A 250VAC up to 6A 125VAC 3A 277VAC up to 5A 125VAC 2A 250VAC up to 20A 125VAC 10A 250VAC Mounting Hole Specifications .500” dia .500” dia .500” dia .500” dia .500” dia [12.7mm] [12.7mm] [12.7mm] [12.7mm] [12.7mm] Termination solder lug wire leads solder lug screw terms wire leads .250 tabs solder lug wire leads solder lug wire leads PC terms .250 tabs screw terms wire leads Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA, TUV bushing mount bushing mount bushing mount bushing mount bushing mount ROTARY NEW R135 700 / 800 V-Rotary Poles 1 1 1, 2 Ratings 1.5A 250VAC 3A 125VAC 5A 12VDC up to 3A 250VAC 6A 125VAC up to 15A 24VDC 20A 12VDC Actuator round asymmetrical ergonomic knob Mounting Hole Specifications .375” dia [9.52mm] bushing mount .500” dia [12.7mm] snap-in mount [12.7mm] [21.08mm x 36.83mm] Termination wire leads .125 tabs solder lug .250 tabs solder lug .250 tabs wire leads Illumination n/a n/a incandescent, LED Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA pending .500” dia bushing mount .830” x 1.450” snap-in mount *Options and approvals shown may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. 4 www.carlingtech.com Tippette Tippette Switches (TIG,TIH,TII & LTIL,LTIG) - Introduction Tippette FULL SIZED ROCKER SWITCHES The Tippette Series is a traditionally styled rocker switch, available in sealed or unsealed versions. These switches are appropriate for use in general purpose applications which may or may not require a modicum of environmental protection. The Tippette Series is available in both illuminated and non-illuminated versions and features a wide variety of circuits, actuator styles and bracket options. This versatile offering includes international agency certifications and ratings to 26 amps for select circuits. Electrical Contact Rating 15 amps, 125 VAC 10 amps, 250 VAC 3/4 HP 125-250 VAC 15 amps, 12-30 VDC Life 25,000 cycles circuit dependent 50,000 cycles circuit dependent consult factory for applicable circuits. Contacts Fine silver, silver cad-oxide Terminals Brass or copper/silver plate 1/4” (6.3mm) Quick Connect terminations standard. Solder lug - Brass Tin Plated Wire Lead 16 gauge standard 105°C 600VAC Screw Terminals - Brass Agency Certifications Select circuits and constructions with VDE/IEC approvals are available. Consult factory Physical Lighted Seals Base Rocker/Bracket Incandescent - rated 10,000 hours Neon - rated 25,000 hours Bracket - Actuator WBL/MBL optional external gasket panel seal Phenolic (150°C) Nylon 66 (105°C) Mechanical Endurance 100,000 cycles minimum Mounting 1.190 [30.22] .680 [17.27] MOUNTING HOLE (Nylon Snap-in Brackets) Panel Thickness: .040 min. - .250 max. .830 [21.08] 55˚ - 4 places 1.450 [36.83] *Angled corners are suggested for optimum fit. Standard rectangular cutout is acceptable. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 5 TIG/TIH/TII & LTIL/LTIG-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - Ordering Schemes TIGA51 6M 2 Actuator Style 1 Base Part Number BL 3 Actuator Color 4 Bracket 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES/POLES / CIRCUITRY 8,11 / RATING 7 / TERMINATION 10 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250VAC, 15A 6-28VDC Single Pole in Double Pole base 2 Double Pole solder .250 screw wire solder .250 screw wire lug tab term. leads lug tab term. leads TIGA50 TIGA51 TIGA54 TIGA55 On-None-Off TIGK50 TIGK51 TIGK54 TIGK55 TIGA5A TIGA5BTIGA5E TIGA5F (On)-None-Off TIGK5A TIGK5BTIGK5ETIGK5F TIGA5L TIGA5MTIGA5S TIGA5T On-None-(Off) TIGK5L TIGK5MTIGK5STIGK5T TIGB50 TIGB51TIGB54 TIGB55 On-None-On TIGL50 TIGL51 TIGL54TIGL55 TIGB5A TIGB5BTIGB5E TIGB5F On-None-(On) TIGL5A TIGL5BTIGL5ETIGL5F TIGC50 TIGC51TIGC54 TIGC55 On-Off-On TIGM50 TIGM51 TIGM54TIGM55 TIGC5A TIGC5BTIGC5E TIGC5F On-Off-(On) TIGM5A TIGM5BTIGM5ETIGM5F TIGC5L TIGC5MTIGC5S TIGC5T (On)-Off-(On) TIGM5L TIGM5MTIGM5STIGM5T Three Pole Four Pole solder .250 screw wire solder .250 screwwire lug tab term. leads lug tab term.leads TIHK50 TIHK51TIHK54 TIHK55 On-None-Off TIIK50 TIIK51 TIIK54TIIK55 TIHK5A TIHK5BTIHK5E TIHK5F (On)-None-Off TIIK5A TIIK5BTIIK5ETIIK5F TIHK5L TIHK5MTIHK5S TIHK5T On-None-(Off) TIIK5L TIIK5MTIIK5STIIK5T TIHL50 TIHL51TIHL54 TIHL55 On-None-On TIIL50 TIIL51 TIIL54TIIL55 TIHL5A TIHL5BTIHL5E TIHL5F On-None-(On) TIIL5A TIIL5BTIIL5ETIIL5F TIHM50 TIHM51TIHM54 TIHM55 On-Off-On TIIM50 TIIM51 TIIM54TIIM55 TIHM5A TIHM5BTIHM5E TIHM5F On-Off-(On) TIIM5A TIIM5BTIIM5ETIIM5F TIHM5L TIHM5MTIHM5S TIHM5T (On)-Off-(On) TIIM5L TIIM5MTIIM5STIIM5T VDE APPROVED 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 12(6)A 250VAC T85 Single Pole in Double Pole base 2 Double Pole solder.250 wire solder .250 wire lug tablead lug tab lead TIGA90 TIGA91TIGA95 On-None-Off TIGK90 TIGK91TIGK95 TIGB90 TIGB91TIGB95 On-None-On TIGL90 TIGL91TIGL95 TIGC90 TIGC91TIGC95 On-Off-On TIGM90 TIGM91TIGM95 Additional ratings up to 20A 125-277VAC, 1 1/2HP 125 VAC, 2HP 250VAC are available. Consult factory for specifics. 2 ACTUATOR STYLE 1S Angular/Smooth Face Gloss 12 1C Angular/Cross Serrations Gloss 12 1F Flatted/Smooth Face Gloss 12 1L Angular/Longline Serrations Gloss 1,12 2L Long Smooth/Narrow 14 LTILA51 1 Base Part Number 6M 6S 7S 7N 7P 6M 2 Actuator Style Curved/Smooth Face Matte 3 Curved/Smooth Face Gloss 3 Rounded Paddle/Smooth Face Gloss 1 Witch’s Hat/Narrow 14 Witch’s Hat/Wide 14 BL 3 Actuator Color RC 4 Lens Color 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / ILLUMINATION / CIRCUITRY 12 / RATING 10 / TERMINATION 14 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250VAC, 15A 15-28VDC illuminated Single Pole in Double Pole base illuminated Double Pole solder.250 screw wire solder .250 screw wire lug tab term. leads lug tab term leads LTILA50 LTILA51LTILA54 LTILA55 On-None-Off LTIGK50LTIGK51LTIGK54LTIGK55 LTILA5A LTILA5BLTILA5E LTILA5F (On)-None-Off LTIGK5A LTIGK5BLTIGK5ELTIGK5F LTILA5L LTILA5MLTILA5S LTILA5T On-None-(Off) LTIGK5L LTIGK5MLTIGK5SLTIGK5T LTILB50 LTILB51LTILB54 LTILB55 On-None-On LTIGL50LTIGL51LTIGL54LTIGL55 LTILB5A LTILB5BLTILB5E LTILB5F On-None-(On) LTIGL5A LTIGL5BLTIGL5ELTIGL5F LTILC50 LTILC51LTILC54 LTILC55 On-Off-On LTIGM50LTIGM51LTIGM54LTIGM55 LTILC5A LTILC5BLTILC5E LTILC5F On-Off-(On) LTIGM5A LTIGM5BLTIGM5ELTIGM5F LTILC5L LTILC5MLTILC5S LTILC5T (On)-Off-(On) LTIGM5L LTIGM5MLTIGM5SLTIGM5T Additional ratings up to 12A 250VAC, 17A 125 VAC, 3/4 HP 125 VAC, 1HP 250VAC are available. Consult factory for specifics. Three pole switch is also available: Substitute H for fourth digit of part number. ex. LTIHK51 Notes: 1 NBL, FN, & FW brackets only. Double pole circuits provided with 3 pole base. 2 LTIL-Series with NBL, FN, & FW brackets only. 3 NBL, WBL, & MBL brackets only. With 6M actuator, bracket will also be matte finish. 4 1S, 1C, 1L & 7S with NBL bracket only available with LTIL-Series. 5 6M, 6S actuators only. 6 Not available with 6M and 6S actuators. 7 Not recommended with neon lamps. 8 Consists of WBL bracket, neoprene seal, dummy rivets at open holes. Consult factory for agency approval status. 9 Not recommended with blue or green lenses. 10 All ratings are appropriate for usage in low voltage applications. 11 Custom colors and additional bracket styles are available, consult factory. 12 ( ) - momentary 13 All double throw circuits supplied with two lenses. To specify two different lens colors, specify second color, after first color. (ex. LTIGM51-6S-BL-RC/GN-WBL-12V) 14 .187 tab and PC terminations are also available. Consult factory for catalog number callout. 6 MBL 3 ACTUATOR COLOR 9 BL Black WH White RD Red 4 BRACKET STYLE 9 A Screw Mount 5 B Screw Mount 5,12 C Screw Mount 5 H Screw Mount 5 NBL Nylon Black WBL Water shedding Black 4 MBL Marine Style Black 4,6 FN Metal Snap-In 5 FN BLK Black Metal Snap-In 5 FN SS Stainless Steel Snap-In 5 FW Wide Stainless Steel Snap-In 5 Notes: 1 NBL, FN, & FW brackets only. 2 For single pole switch in a single pole base, specify TIL with single pole circuitry/rating/termination. 3 NBL, WBL, & MBL brackets only. With 6M actuator, brackets also will be matte finish. 4 6M & 6S actuators only 5 Not available with 6M & 6S actuators. 6 Consists of WBL bracket, neoprene seal, and dummy rivets at open holes. Consult factory for agency approval status. 7 All ratings are appropriate for usage in low voltage applications. 8 For additional special circuits, see catalog. 9 Custom colors are available, consult factory. 10 .187 tab and PC terminations are also available. Consult factory for catalog number callout. 11 ( ) momentary 12 Not available with WBL or MBL style brackets. 13 Available with bracket A, C or H only. 14 Not available with MBL, WBL or H brackets. Can be supplied as a double rocker to control separate poles of a TIG,TIH or TII switch. Consult factory for details. MBL 5 Bracket 12V 6 Lamp Voltage 2 ACTUATOR STYLE 4 1S Angular/Smooth Face Gloss 1 1C Angular/Cross Serrations Gloss 1 1L Angular/Longline Serrations Gloss 1 6M Curved/Smooth Face Matte 3 6S Curved/Smooth Face Gloss 3 7S Rounded Paddle/Smooth Face Gloss 2 3 ACTUATOR COLOR 11 BL Black WH White RD Red 4 LENS COLOR 13 AMAmber RCRed GNGreen 7 LU Blue 7 CLClear WHWhite 5 BRACKET STYLE 11 NBL Nylon Black WBL Water shedding Black 5 MBL Marine Style Black 5,8 FN Metal Snap-In 4,6 FN BLK Black Metal Snap-In 4,6 FN SS Stainless Steel Snap-In 4,6 6 LAMP VOLTAGE neon 9 125N 125 volt 250N 250 volt incandescent 6V 6 volt 12V 12 volt 18V 18 volt 24V 24 volt 28V 28 volt www.carlingtech.com Tippette Rocker & Bracket Styles - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1C 1L 1S CROSS-LINE W/ONE LENS LONG-LINE W/ONE LENS SMOOTH W/ONE LENS 1.700[43.18] 1.700[43.18] 1.700[43.18] .960[24.38] .650[16.51] .960[24.38] .418[10.62] 1.069[27.15] ±.020 .422[10.72] 1.069[27.15] 1.440[36.58] ±.020 1.440[36.58] .312[7.92] WITH.250 TAB TERMINALS AND NBL BRACKET .422[10.72] WITH SOLDER LUG TERMINAL AND NBL BRACKET 1F WITH.250 TAB TERMINALS AND NBL BRACKET 7S 6M, 6S FLATTED STYLE NO LENS TOGGLE-STYLE W/ONE LENS CURVED W/ONE LENS 1.700[43.18] .900[22.86] .960[24.38] .650[16.51] .900[22.86] 1.570[39.88] .418[10.62] .356[9.04] 1.570[39.88] .060[1.52] .828[21.03] 1.080[27.43] ±.020 .422[10.72] .060[1.52] 1.080[27.43] 1.069[27.15] ±.020 1.440[36.58] .422[10.72] .312[7.92] WITH.250 TAB TERMINALS AND FN BRACKET www.carlingtech.com WITH SOLDER LUG TERMINALS AND NBL BRACKET WITH.250 TAB TERMINALS AND FN BRACKET 7 Tippette Actuator Styles & Special Circuits - Dimensional Specifications .650[16.51] .075[1.91] DIA .125[3.18] DIA .330[8.38] 1.069[27.15] .372[9.45] .392[9.95] .055[1.40] DIA .437[11.09] .394[10.00] .250[6.35] .187[4.74] .187[4.74] SOLDER LUG .250 TAB (Q.C.) TERMINAL TYPE .820[20.82] #6-32NC-2 THREAD 6.000[152.40] .370[9.39] .500[12.70] .286[7.26] 1.190[30.22] .075[1.905] IEC APPROVED CONSTRUCTION (TIG ONLY) .830[21.08] 55˚ 4 plcs* 1.450[36.83] .650[16.51] .957[24.30] WIRE LEAD MOUNTING HOLE (Nylon Snap-in Brackets) Panel Thickness: .030 min. - .250 max. Switch should be mounted at 90˚ for maximum water shedding (45˚ to 90˚ acceptable) .490[22.86] .650[16.51] .957[24.30] 1.224[31.08] .957[24.30] 1L 1C 1S TIL,TIG,TIH,TII TIL,TIG,TIH,TII TIL,TIG,TIH,TII .957[24.30] 1.224[31.08] .312[7.92] 1.224[31.08] PRINTED CIRCUIT * Angled corners are suggested for optimum fit. Standard rectangular cutout is acceptable. .650[16.51] 1.224[31.08] .187[4.75] .350[8.89] SCREW (ASSEMBLED) .680[17.27] .187[4.75] .141[3.58] 1.069[27.15] 1.224[31.08] .187 TAB (Q.C.) .650[16.51] .957[24.30] 1.024[26.00] .300[7.62] 1F 2L TIG, TII TIL,TIG,TIH,TII 1.224[31.08] 6S TIG .630[16.00] .430[10.90] .650[16.51] .250[6.35] 1.035[26.28] .996[25.30] 1.224[31.08] .880[22.40] 7N 7P TIG TIG TIG SPECIAL CIRCUITS FOR TIPPETTE ROCKER SWITCHES Circuit Position 1 Position 2 Progressive Two Circuit GG BOTH CIRCUITS ON ONE CIRCUIT ON GG BOTH CIRCUITS (ON) ONE CIRCUIT ON Single Pole Triple Throw GEON ON Two Circuit GH CIRCUIT 1 ON BOTH CIRCUITS ON GP CIRCUIT 2 ON CIRCUIT 1 ON Reversing Double Pole Double Throw GOON OFF GX ON NONE () 8 .880[22.4] 7S Indicates momentary function. Position 3 OFF OFF ON CIRCUIT 2 ON OFF ON ON www.carlingtech.com Tippette Mounting Bracket Styles - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1.190[30.22] # 6-32NC-2 TAP .680[17.27] .156[3.96] DIA .070[1.77] .830[21.08] 55˚ 4 plcs* .158[4.01] DIA 1.450[36.83] TAPPED HOLE CLEARANCE HOLE TIG TIL 1.940[49.27] 1.960[49.78] .078[1.98] 1.625[41.27] A .078[1.98] 1.625[41.27] 2.093[53.16] 1.625[41.27] A A TIG TIL TIH 1.892[48.06] .078[1.98] 1.625[41.27] (Nylon Snap-in Brackets) Panel Thickness: .030 min. - .250 max. * Angled corners are suggested for optimum fit. Standard rectangular cutout is acceptable. TII 1.940[49.27] .078[1.98] MOUNTING HOLE Standard with C Bracket Standard with A & B Brackets A TII TIH 2.090[53.08] .156[3.96] .156[3.96] 1.625[41.27] 1.625[41.27] B B TIL TII, TIG 1.875[47.62] 1.940[49.27] 2.062[52.37] .426[10.82] .426[10.82] .437[11.09] 1.625[41.27] 1.625[41.27] CX C C TIL TIG TIH, TII 1.625[41.27] 1.950[49.53] 1.700[43.18] GCP 1.350[34.29] GLOSS FINISH .960[24.38] 1.625[41.27] GMP MATTE FINISH HOLE PLUG FOR TIL, TIG, TIH & TII 1.570[39.88] H .430[10.92] TIG NARROW WIDE 1.126[28.60] .900[22.86] www.carlingtech.com MARINE / STD / WATERSHEDDING 1.750[44.45] 1.570[39.87] 1.700[43.18] .960[24.38] FN FW TIL, TIG, TIH, TII METAL, SNAP-IN TIL, TIG, TIH, TII METAL, SNAP-IN MBL, NBL, WBL TIG BLACK NYLON, SNAP-IN 9 LS-Series Rocker Switches - Introduction LS-Series LS-Series ROCKER SWITCHES The LS-Series Softspot illuminated rocker switches feature a three-color high brightness light sequence, from a single lamp. These switches are designed with a standard nylon snap-in bracket and “Drip-Dry” construction that protects the front panel from dust and moisture. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Water Resistant Construction Independent or Dependent Illumination Up to 3 Different Colors Under a Single Lens Multiple Termination Options 10 Marine Transportation www.carlingtech.com LS-Series Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life Electrical Life Operating Temperature 1000V - live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles 50,000 cycles - maintained 25,000 cycles - momentary LS1511 1 Base Part Number 0°F to 150°F (-17.8°C to +65.6°C) 13 2 Lighting Sequence 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / ILLUMINATION / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 3 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250VAC, 15A 15-28VDC Single Pole Solder Lug .250 Tab QC Screw Terms Wire Leads On-None-Off LS1510LS1511 LS1514 LS1515 On-None-(Off) LS1520 LS1521LS1524LS1525 (On)-None-Off LS1530 LS1531LS1534LS1535 On-None-On LS1540 LS1541LS1544LS1545 On-None-(On) LS1550 LS1551LS1554LS1555 On-Off-On LS1560 LS1561LS1564LS1565 On--Off-(On) LS1570 LS1571LS1574LS1575 (On)-Off-(On) LS1580 LS1581LS1584LS1585 Notes: 1 Independent lamp is standard. Dependent lamp with ON-OFF function (including momentary) is available with Lighting Sequences 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50. (No light in OFF position.) 2 Green and blue not recommended with 125 volt or 250 volt neon lamps. 3 Additional terminations available. Consult factory. 4 Custom colors available. Consult factory. ( ) Indicates momentary function. BL BL 3 Actuator Color 012 4 Base Color 5 Lamp Voltage 2 LIGHTING SEQUENCE 1,2 position 1 position 2 01red red 02amber amber 03green green 10 red --- 11red clear 12red clear 13red clear 14red clear 15red clear 20 amber --- 21amber clear 22amber clear 23amber clear 24amber clear 25amber clear 30 green --- 31green clear 32green clear 33green clear 34green clear 35green clear 40 blue --- 41blue clear 42blue clear 43blue clear 44blue clear 45blue clear 50 clear --- 51clear clear 52clear clear 53clear clear 54clear clear 55clear clear position 3 red amber green none red amber green blue clear none red amber green blue clear none red amber green blue clear none red amber green blue clear none red amber green blue clear .075[1.91] DIA .125[3.18] DIA 3 ACTUATOR COLOR 4 BL Black WH White 4 BASE COLOR 4 BL Black WH White 5 LAMP VOLTAGE 2 incandescent 6V 6 volt 12V 12 volt 18V 18 volt 24V 24 volt 28V 28 volt neon 125N 125 volt neon 250N 250 volt neon .055[1.40] DIA 1.700[43.18] 1.190[30.22] .330[8.38] .437[11.09] .394[10.00] .250[6.35] .187[4.74] .680[17.27] .187[4.74] .960[24.38] .830[21.08] SOLDER LUG 55˚ 4 plcs* .150[3.81] DIA 1.084[27.53] .250 TAB (Q.C.) .187 TAB (Q.C.) TERMINAL TYPE 1.450[36.83] .372[9.45] MOUNTING HOLE (Nylon Snap-in Brackets) Panel Thickness: .040 min. - .250 max. Switch should be mounted at 90˚ for maximum water shedding (45˚ to 90˚ acceptable) .422[10.72] #6-32NC-2 THREAD 6.000[152.40] .187[4.75] .141[3.58] .370[9.39] .500[12.70] .350[8.89] .286[7.26] SCREW (ASSEMBLED) .187[4.75] WIRE LEAD PRINTED CIRCUIT * Angled corners are suggested for optimum fit. Standard rectangular cutout is acceptable. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 11 S-Series Rocker Switches - Introduction S-Series S-Series ROCKER SWITCHES S-Series rocker switches are designed for use in the enclosed cabs of today’s trucks, with special focus afforded to the vehicle operator. With features including abbreviated travel ½ throw actuation, ergonomic rockers, illumination in up to three detent switch positions, and a non-teasable snap action circuit, these switches provide the driver with easily recognizable and simple to operate controls. Designers will appreciate the 10A, 24VDC rating, space saving compact envelope, clean bezel-less design, integrated low insertion force connector and polarized switch base for quick installation. Most any illumination and switch circuitry is easily accommodated with the S-Series 10 terminal base. Product Highlights: Abbreviated travel ½ throw actuation Ergonomic rockers Recognizable and simple to operate controls Compact Design Typical Applications: On-Highway Transportation Equipment Agricultural Equipment Construction Equipment Marine 12 www.carlingtech.com S-Series Rocker Switches - General Specifications Electrical Contact Rating 10A@ 24VDC Dielectric Strength 1500 Volts RMS between pole to pole Insulation Resistance 50 Megaohms Contact Resistance 10 milliohms max. @ 4VDC Contact Bounce <20 milliseconds Life 100,000 cycles maintained circuit,50,000 cycles momentary circuit at rated voltage and current gold plated Circuitry SP, DP 2 & 3 position, 1/2 or full throw Terminals .110 Tabs, Silver Plated Brass Mechanical Endurance 250,000 cycles minimum Physical Lighted LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life (LED is internally ballasted for voltages to 24VDC.) BracketAcetal Base Nylon 66 GF RockerPolycarbonate Weight 25 gms max. Environmental Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C Vibration Per IEC 68-2.6 test Fc and 68-2.47 Test Criteria - no noise or contact chatter below 10ms. Cold Test Per IEC 68-2-1 -40°C for 72 hours Test Criteria - pre & post test contact resistance. Dry Heat Test Criteria Per IEC 68-2-2 + 85°C for 72 hours Test Criteria - no loss of circuit during test, pre & post test contact resistance. Handling Shock Drop from height of 1 meter, 3 times, 4 sides. Test criteria - No loss of circuit during test, pre & post test contact resistance. Thermal Shock Per IEC 68-2-14, -40°C to +85°C. Test criteria - pre & post test contact resistance. Mounting Specifications Snap in Mount 40mm x 20mm keyed hole (see dimensional specifications for details.) Connector Amp/Tyco MCP 2.8 receptacle housing P/N 1418994-1 mates with Amp/Tyco MCP 2.8 flat type receptacle. Based on wire size, choose P/N below: 1-968880-1 1-968849-1 1-968851-1 20-24 awg wire 17-20 awg wire 13.5-17 awg wire Actuator Travel (Angular Displacement) 2 position (1/2 throw) 3 position (full throw) 12° 12° from center *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 13 S-Series Rocker Switches - Ordering Scheme S 18 A A R F 0 4 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 Illumination Lamp 1 6 Lamp 2 7 Lamp 3 8 Bracket Color ( ) - momentary SP - single pole uses terminals DP - double pole uses terminals 2 Connected Terminals OFF OFF 3 3 & 5, 4 & 6 ON (ON) 4, 5, 6, 7 OFF OFF 3&5 3&5 OFF 5&7 5&7 5 & 7, 4 & 6 5 & 7, 4 & 6 OFF NONE 1 NONE 1 NONE 1 NONE 1 ON ON (ON) (3 & 5, 4 & 6) (5 & 9, 4 & 6) 3 RATING 1 0.4VA 28VDC Resistive A 3 10.5mA 1.5A 28VDC, 5A 28V 50A Inrush Lamp Load B 4 3.5A 28VDC, 18A Inrush 3 C 10mA 10A 28VDC D 3 20mA 10A 14VDC 4 ILLUMINATION Lamps S NONE A 1 C 1 2 D 1 2 E 1&3 F 1 G 1&2 H 1&2 J 1, 2 & 3 K 1&2 14 9 Actuator Color 10 Legend Color 1 11 Legend Color 2 12 Legend Color 3 13 Legend 1 1 00 00 15 14 Legend 2 Legend Orientation 16 Legend 3 5,6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR ALL 3 SELECTIONS) Selection 5: specifies lamp 1 located above terminals 1 (+) & 2 (-). Selection 6: specifies lamp 2 located in center of rocker. Selection 7: specifies lamp 3 located above terminals 9 (+) & 10 (-). 1 SERIES S 2 CIRCUIT Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: 1 - - 2 3, 5 & 7. 3 - - 4 3, 5, 7 & 4, 6, 8. 5--6 7--8 9 - - 10 Position: 1 SP DP 5 & 7, 6 & 8 16 26 ON 18 28 (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS 31 (6 & 8) 41 51 ON 42 52 (ON) 43 53 (ON) 44 54 ON 45 55 (ON) 46 56 NONE 47 57 NONE 75 (5 & 7, 3 & 6) 2 98 (5 & 7, 2 & 6) M Z Z Z 00 No lamp LED 12VDC 24VDC 0 Red A B Green H J 8 BRACKET COLOR 1 Black 4 Dark Carbon 9 ACTUATOR Standard Rocker, Laser Etched Black Titan Gray M N Dark Carbon R 10, 11, 12 LEGEND COLOR Z No Legend 1 Clear 13 LEGEND 1 5 00 No Legend ORIENTATION 1 14 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 M22ZA8-13H-10000 M22ZA8-23H-10000 Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals INDEPENDENT – INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 2 (–) INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 2 (–) INDEPENDENT 9 (+) 2 (–) INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 2 (–) INDEPENDENT 9 (+) 10 (–) INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 2 (–) PARALLEL INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 10 (–) SNAP INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 10 (–) DEPENDENT 9 (+) 2 (–) INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 2 (–) DEPENDENT 9 (+) 10 (–) INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 2 (–) DEPENDENT 5 (+) 10 (–) INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 2 (–) INDEPENDENT 1 (+) 2 (–) INDEPENDENT 9 (+) 10 (–) 3.3K RESISTOR IN PARALLEL Orange Yellow C E D F ORIENTATION 4 ORIENTATION 2 ORIENTATION 3 15,16 LEGEND 2,3 6 00 No legend Notes: 1 Indicates 1/2 travel for actuator. 2 Snap-Action Contact Mechanism 3 Not available with circuit 98. 4 Available with circuit 98 only. 5 Located over T1-2. 6 Legend 2 located in center of rocker, Legend 3 located over T9-10. Legend 2 options are limited due to a very small marking area. Consult factory for specifics. www.carlingtech.com S-Series Rocker Switches - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] MATES WITH TYCO/AMP MCP CONNECTOR 1418994-1 1.529 [38.84] .787 [19.99] .83 [21.1] .100 [2.54] PANEL KEY .048 [1.22] .032 [.81] 1.575 [40.01] R.016 [.41] (8 PLACES) R.079 [2.01] (4 PLACES) PANEL THICKNESS: 2.5±0.1mm PANEL OPENING CLEARANCE: ±5° SCALE 2.000 POS 0 POS 2 POS 1 R.833±.015 [21.15±0.38] SWING RADIUS .220 [5.59] 12° 12° .82 [20.8] .790 [20.07] 1.23 [31.2] 1.60 [40.6] www.carlingtech.com .79 [20.1] 15 T-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - Introduction T-Series T-Series SINGLE POLE ROCKER & PADDLE SWITCHES The predecessor to the Curvette series whose versatility has allowed it to stand the test of time. Traditional styling coupled with self cleaning contacts, integrated wire leads, a multitude of circuits, ratings, and actuator choices has made the TA/LTA-Series appeal to a wide range of markets. Product Highlights: Ratings Up To 20A Rocker, Paddle, Plunger or Door Interlock Actuators Integrated Wire Lead Construction Self-Cleaning Wiping Style Contacts Typical Applications: Appliance HVAC Food Service Transportation 16 www.carlingtech.com T-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 100,000 cycles T B TA201 1 Base Part Number 2 Actuator Style 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING 4 / TERMINATION 10A 250 VAC, 15A 125 VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250 VAC Solder Lugs .250 Tabs Wire Leads Standard Base ON-NONE-OFF TA200TA201 TA205 ON-NONE-ON TB200TB201 TB205 ON-OFF-ON TC200TC201 TC205 5A 250 VAC, 10A 125 VAC, 1/2 HP 125-250 VAC (ON)-NONE-OFFTA10A TA10B TA10F ON-NONE-(OFF)TA10L TA10M TA10T ON-NONE-(ON)TB10A TB10B TB10F T-SERIES WITH PLUNGER ACTUATOR1,2 10A 250 VAC, 16A 125 VAC, 1/2 HP 125-250 VAC OFF-NONE-(ON) - TA25B-PLB-B TA25F-PLB-B ON-NONE-(OFF) - - TA25T-PLB-B T SERIES WITH MOMENTARY ROCKER ACTUATOR 10A 250 VAC, 15A 125 VAC, 20A 125-250 VAC “H”, 3/4 HP 125-250 VAC (ON)-NONE-OFF - TA22B-TLB-B - ON-NONE-(OFF) - TA22M-TLB-B - B 3 Actuator Color 4 Bezel Color/Style 2 ACTUATOR STYLE T Rocker P Paddle PS Short Paddle 3 ACTUATOR COLOR 5 B Black W White 4 BEZEL COLOR 5 B Black W White Notes: Imprinting is available. Consult factory. 1 Optional plunger support option is available for applications requiring extensive lateral travel, consult factory for details. 2 Maintained circuit not available with TA22 and TA25 Series. 3 .187 tab terminals also available. Consult factory for catalog number callout. 4 Additional ratings are available. Consult factory. 5 Additional colors are available. Consult factory. ( ) Indicates momentary function. .156[3.96] DIA .069[1.75] DIA .220[5.59] .050[1.27] .390[9.77] .375[9.52] .250[6.35] .055[1.40] DIA 6.000[152.40] .250[6.35] .250[6.35] .187[4.74] .250 TAB (Q.C.) .860[21.84] SOLDER LUG .187 TAB (Q.C.) .500[12.70] INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD (no exposed conductors) TERMINAL TYPE .550[13.97] .375[9.52] .250[6.35] 1.120[28.44] .544[13.81] .275[6.98] SHORT PADDLE 1.125[28.57] 1.156[29.36] .520[13.20] .047[1.19] .453[11.50] .500[12.70] .430[10.92] MOMENTARY ROCKER OPERATING POINT PADDLE PLUNGER MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .020[.508] min. to .250[6.35] max. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 17 LTA-Series Single Pole Lighted Rocker Switches - Introduction LTA-Series LTA-Series SINGLE POLE LIGHTED ROCKER SWITCHES The illuminated predecessor to the Curvette series whose versatility has allowed it to stand the test of time. Traditional styling coupled with self cleaning contacts, integrated wire leads, and various actuator choices has made the LTA-Series appeal to a wide range of markets. Product Highlights: Neon or Incandescent Illumination Long Paddle, Short Paddle or Rocker Actuators Good for 125/250VAC or Low Voltage DC Applications Integrated Wire Lead Construction Typical Applications: Appliance HVAC Food Service Transportation 18 www.carlingtech.com LTA-Series Single Pole Lighted Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts 750V - across open contacts 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) Electrical Life 100,000 cycles LTA201 B -A / 125N P R 1 Base Part Number 2 Actuator Style 3 Actuator Color 4 Bezel Color/Style 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING 1 / TERMINATION 10A 250VAC; 15A 125VAC; 3/4 HP 125-250VAC Solder Lugs .250 Tabs .187 Tabs Wire Leads OFF-NONE-ONLTA200 LTA201 LTA203 LTA205 2 ACTUATOR STYLE 3 T Rocker P Paddle 3 ACTUATOR COLOR 1 A Amber C Clear R Red G Green 2 PS Short Paddle B Black 4 WWhite 4 5 Lens Color 6 Lamp Voltage 4 BEZEL COLOR 1 B Black W 5 LENS COLOR 2,3 Blank No Lens -A Amber -C Clear -G -R -LU Green Red Blue 6 LAMP VOLTAGE 2 006V 6V incandescent 012V 12V incandescent 018V 18V incandescent 024V 125N 250N 24V incandescent 125V neon 250V neon White Notes: 1 Additional ratings and colors are available. Consult factory for details. 2 Neon lamps not recommended with green or blue rocker/lenses. 3 Lens color is specified only if actuator style is P or PS. If style is T (rocker), then leave position 5 blank. 4 Available with paddle (“P & PS”) style actuators only. .069[1.75] DIA .375[9.52] .250[6.35] .050[1.27] 6.000[152.40] .250[6.35] .500[12.70] .250[6.35] .250[6.35] .390[9.77] .055[1.40] DIA .156[3.96] DIA .187[4.74] .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG .187 TAB (Q.C.) INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD (no exposed conductors) TERMINAL TYPE .550[13.97] .860[21.84] .375[9.52] .520 [13.20] .544[13.81] 1.125[28.57] .275[6.98] .890[22.60] 1.120[28.44] PADDLE SHORT PADDLE MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .020[.508] min. to .250[6.35] max. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 19 TG/LTG-Series Rocker Switches - Introduction TG/LTG TG/LTG-Series ROCKER SWITCHES The TG-Series Mid-Sized Tippette rocker switches are single or double pole and feature an all nylon doubleinsulated construction. These switches are designed with snap-in mounting for fast, low cost assembly. The illuminated version (LTG) is available with either a paddle or rocker actuator. These AC rated switches are also suitable for low-voltage DC applications assuring compatibility for a wide range of markets. Product Highlights: Single or Double Pole Gloss Finish Surfaces Illuminated or Non-Illuminated 20 Available Circuit Options 20 Typical Applications: Appliance HVAC Food Service Transportation www.carlingtech.com TG/LTG-Series Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 50,000 cycles - maintained 25,000 cycles - momentary LTG G O 50 1 1 Base Part Number 2 Circuit 3 Center Position 4 Rating 5 Termination T B 6 Actuator Style 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES TG Double Pole, Non-Lighted LTG Double Pole with Indicator Lights 2 CIRCUIT 1 See Circuit Designation Chart 3 CENTER POSITION C Center OFF, Three position O No Center OFF, Two position B 7 Actuator Color 8 Base Color 9 Lens Color 10 Lamp Voltage 6 ACTUATOR STYLE P Paddle T Rocker 7 ACTUATOR COLOR 2 B Black W White 8 BASE COLOR 2 B Black W White 9 LENS COLOR 3 AAmber 4 RATING 40 5A 250VAC, 10A 125VAC, 1/2HP 125-250VAC 41 5A 250VAC, 10A 125VAC 50 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4HP 125-250VAC 51 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC R / 125 CClear 10 LAMP VOLTAGE incandescent 6V 6 volt 12V 12 volt 18V 18 volt 24V 24 volt 28V 28 volt RRed neon 125N 125 volt neon 250N 250 volt neon 5 TERMINATION / FUNCTION Solder Lug .250 Tab QC .187 Tab QC Wire Leads On-None-Off 0 1 3 5 (On)-None-Off AB D F On-None-(Off) LM R T Notes: Imprinting is available. Consult factory. On-None-On 01 3 5 Panel Cut-Out Recommendations: For sheet metal panels, switch must enter panel in same On-None-(On) AB D F direction as the punch. (Burr on bottom.) Test cut hole in actual material. On-Off-On 01 3 5 1 TG available with circuits A, B, C, D, E, F ; LTG available with circuits 2 3 ( ) G, H, I, J, M, N, P, Q, R, T, U, V, Y, Z. Custom colors are available. Consult factory. Specify lens color for LTG-Series only. Indicates momentary function. .069[1.75] DIA .156[3.96] DIA .055[1.40] DIA 6.000[152.40] .375[9.52] .250[6.35] .500[12.70] .250[6.35] 1.155[29.33] .865[21.97] .050[1.27] 1.240[31.50] .250[6.35] SOLDER LUG .250 TAB (Q.C.) .187[4.74] .187 TAB (Q.C.) INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD (no exposed conductors) TERMINAL TYPE .210[5.33] 1.125[28.57] .812[20.62] .520[13.20] 1.000[25.40] .375[9.52] .994[25.24] 1.120[28.45] PADDLE MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .030[.762] min. to .250[6.35] max. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 21 TTG-Series Rocker Switches - Introduction TTG-Series TTG-Series ROCKER SWITCHES The TTG-Series Mid-Sized Tippette snap-in rocker switches consist of two single pole illuminated or nonilluminated switches in a common base. Each pole can have the same or different switch function. These switches are AC rated up to 20 amps and are also suitable for low-voltage DC applications, in a wide range of markets. Product Highlights: Independent or Dependent Illumination Ratings up to 20 Amps Diamond or Long Line Lens Options Self-Cleaning Wiping Style Contacts 22 Typical Applications: Appliance HVAC Food Service Transportation www.carlingtech.com TTG-Series Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 50,000 cycles - maintained 25,000 cycles - momentary TTG T 1 Base Part Number 2 Circuit T B P B TA 20 1 LTA 20 1 3 Center Position 4 Rating 5 Termination 6 Actuator Style 7 Actuator Color B B R / 125N 8 Base Color 9 Lens Color 10 Lamp Voltage 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES TTG Two Single Pole switches in one base 6 ACTUATOR STYLE P Paddle PS Short Paddle T Rocker 2 CIRCUIT 1 See Circuit Designation Chart 7 ACTUATOR COLOR unlighted 2 B Black W White lighted 3 A Amber C Clear G Green LU Blue R Red 3 BASIC SWITCH NUMBER TA On-None-Off TB On-None-On On-Off-On On-None-Off, Lighted TC LTA 8 BASE COLOR 2 B Black 4 RATING 10 5A 250VAC, 10A 125VAC, 1/2HP 125-250VAC 11 5A 250VAC, 10A 125VAC, 5A 125VAC L 20 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4HP 125-250VAC 21 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC 22 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 20A 125-250VAC H, 3/4HP 125-250VAC W 9 LENS COLOR 4 A Amber C Clear 5 TERMINATION / FUNCTION Solder Lug .250 Tab QC .187 Tab QC Wire Leads On-None-Off 0 1 3 5 (On)-None-Off AB D F On-None-(Off) LM R T On-None-On 01 3 5 On-None-(On) AB D F On-Off-On 01 3 5 G Green LU Blue 10 LAMP VOLTAGE incandescent 6V 6 volt 12V 12 volt 18V 18 volt 24V 24 volt 28V 28 volt White RRed WWhite neon 125N 125 volt neon 250N 250 volt neon Notes: Imprinting is available. Consult factory. Panel Cut-Out Recommendations: For sheet metal panels, switch must enter panel in same direction as the punch. (Burr on bottom.) Test cut hole in actual material. 1 TG available with circuits A, B, C, D, E, F, L, T, U G, H, I, J, M, N, P, Q, R, T, U, V, Y, Z. 2 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 3 Specify lens color for LTA with rocker only. 4 Specify lens color for LTA with paddle actuators only. ( ) Indicates momentary function. .156[3.96] DIA .069[1.75] DIA .055[1.40] DIA 6.000[152.40] .375[9.52] .250[6.35] 1.155[29.33] .250[6.35] .500[12.70] .250[6.35] .187[4.74] 1.240[31.49] .860[21.84] .250 TAB (Q.C.) .050[1.27] SOLDER LUG .220[5.59] .187 TAB (Q.C.) INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD (no exposed conductors) TERMINAL TYPE .520[13.20] 1.125[28.57] .812[20.62] .275[6.98] 1.000[25.40] .375[9.52] .994[25.24] 1.120[28.44] PADDLE SHORT PADDLE MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .020[.508] min. to .250[6.35] max. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 23 TLG-Series Rocker Switches - Introduction TLG-Series TLG-Series ROCKER SWITCHES The TLG-Series Mid-Sized Tippette snap-in rocker switches are single pole, rocker or paddle actuated with an adjacent indicator light. These single-actuator-switches are AC rated to 20 amps and are also suitable for low voltage DC applications. Product Highlights: Maintained or Momentary Circuitry Rocker Paddle or mixed Rocker/Paddle actuators Illuminated or Non-Illuminated Integrated wire lead construction Typical Applications: Appliance HVAC Food Service Transportation 24 www.carlingtech.com TLG-Series Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 50,000 cycles - maintained 25,000 cycles - momentary TLG G D R 1 Base Part Number 2 Circuit 3 Lens Design T B TA 20 1 4 Lens Color 5 Center Position 6 Rating 7 Termination 8 Actuator Style B 9 Actuator Color / 125N 10 11 Base Color Lens Color 12 Lamp Voltage 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES TLG Single Pole with adjacent Indicator Light 8 ACTUATOR STYLE 2 P Paddle PS Short Paddle T Rocker 2 CIRCUIT 4 See Circuit Designation Chart. 9 ACTUATOR COLOR unlighted 2 B Black W White lighted A Amber C Clear G Green LU Blue R Red 3 LENS DESIGN D Diamond L Long Line 4 LENS COLOR A Amber C Clear 10 BASE COLOR 2 B Black G R Green Red 5 BASIC SWITCH NUMBER TA On-None-Off TB On-None-On W White WWhite 9 LENS COLOR 1,3 A Amber C Clear TC LTA On-Off-On On-None-Off, Lighted G Green LU Blue 10 LAMP VOLTAGE 1 incandescent 6V 6 volt 12V 12 volt 18V 18 volt 24V 24 volt 28V 28 volt 6 RATING 10 5A 250VAC, 10A 125VAC, 1/2HP 125-250VAC 11 5A 250VAC, 10A 125VAC, 5A 125VAC L 20 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4HP 125-250VAC 21 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC 22 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 20A 125-250VAC H, 3/4HP 125-250VAC RRed WWhite neon 125N 125 volt neon 250N 250 volt neon Notes: Imprinting is available. Consult factory. Panel Cut-Out Recommendations: For sheet metal panels, switch must enter panel in same 7 TERMINATION / FUNCTION direction as the punch. (Burr on bottom.) Test cut hole in actual material. 1 Neon Lamps not recommended with green or blue actuators and lenses. Solder Lug .250 Tab QC .187 Tab QC Wire Leads On-None-Off 0 135 2 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. (On)-None-Off AB D F 3 Specify lens color only if actuator is lighted paddle. On-None-(Off) LM R T 4 Available with circuits G, H, I, J, K only. ( ) Indicates momentary function. On-None-On On-None-(On) On-Off-On 0 135 AB D F 0 135 .069[1.75] DIA .156[1.75] DIA .055[1.75] DIA 6.000[152.40] .375[9.52] .250[6.35] 1.155[29.33] .250[6.35] .250[6.35] .500[12.70] .187[4.74] .390[9.90] .050[1.27] 1.240[31.49] .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG .187 TAB (Q.C.) INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD (no exposed conductors) TERMINAL TYPE .520[13.20] .220[5.59] 1.125[28.57] .812[20.62] .275[6.98] .375[9.52] .994[25.24] 1.000[25.40] 1.120[28.44] PADDLE SHORT PADDLE MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .020[.508] min. to .250[6.35] max. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 25 TG/LTG, TTG, TLG-Series - Circuit Designation Chart Circuit Designation Chart: 1 4 1 2 2 2 5 2 5 2 5 3 3 3 6 3 6 3 6 A B 4 2 C 4 5 3 D 4 2 2 3 3 F 1 E 4 1 6 3 H 4 2 2 G 3 6 I J 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 6 K L M 1 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 3 6 3 6 P 1 3 Q N 4 1 5 2 6 3 R 4 1 1 2 5 2 5 2 5 3 6 3 6 3 6 V W O 4 1 4 2 5 3 6 S 1 U T 1 4 2 5 2 5 3 6 3 6 Y Z CONTACT TERMINAL Will make contact with switching lever CONTACT TERMINAL AND SWITCH LEVER ISOLATED TERMINAL BULB Does not make contact with switching lever 26 1 www.carlingtech.com RR/LRR-Series Rounded Rocker Switches - Introduction RR/LRR RR/LRR-Series ROUNDED ROCKER SWITCHES Carling Technologies’ RR and LRR-Series round rocker switches feature a uniquely sculpted rocker design with electrical ratings of up to 12A 125VAC, 10A 250VAC and fit an industry standard cutout, making installation a snap. The lighted LRR-Series can be wired to accommodate dependent or independent, illumination, neon or incandescent lamps with red, green, amber or white translucent rockers. Standard or custom actuator legends are available. Product Highlights: 125/250VAC or low voltage 12/24VDC Neon or Incandescent Illumination Industry Std. 20.2mm mounting hole Maintained or momentary circuitry Typical Applications: Appliance Vacuum Cleaners Office Automation Food Service Audio Visual Test & Measurement www.carlingtech.com 27 RR/LRR-Series Rounded Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CUL: 1000V-live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) Electrical Life 50,000 cycles RR 1 1 2 1 Series 2 Circuit 1 SERIES RR Rocker 3 Rating 4 Termination LRR Lighted Rocker B B 5 Actuator Color 6 Base Color N N 7 Lamp Voltage 8 Legend 5 ACTUATOR COLOR RR-Series (Non-Illuminated) Solid Color B Black WWhite RRed LRR-Series (Illuminated) Transparent Color 1 Amber 2Red 3 Blue 4Green 5Clear 2 CIRCUIT 1 On-None-Off 2 (On)-None-Off 3 On-None-(Off) 4 On-None-On 5 On-None-(On) 6 On-Off-On 6 BASE COLOR B Black W White RRed 3 RATING 1 1 10A, 125-250VAC; 12A 125 VAC 1/4 HP 125-250 VAC 3 6A, 28 VDC 4 12A, 12 VDC 5 12A, 6 VDC 4 TERMINATION 2 .187 Tab Notes: 1 Rating Code “1” has UL and cUL approval. 2 Neon Lamps (125 or 250 Volts) not recommended with green or blue actuators. 3 LED illumination (6V, 12V or 24V) not recommended with blue or clear actuators. 7 LAMP VOLTAGE N None A 6V Incandescent B 12V Incandescent C 28V Incandescent J 2 K 2 1 3 2 3 3 3 125V Neon 250V Neon 6V LED 12V LED 24V LED 8 ROCKER FACE LEGEND N No imprinting A On-Off (vertical) B On-Off (horizontal) D I-O (horizontal) E I-O (vertical) F G H J K O (on rocker end) II-O-I (vertical) II-O-I (horizontal) Off-On (vertical) Off-On (horizontal) .187[4.74] X .032[.812] .780[19.8] DIA .421[10.7] .187 TAB (Q.C) .906[23.0] DIA TERMINAL TYPE .079[2.0] .433[11.0] .087[11.0] .158[4.0] .079[2.0] .591[15.0] RECOMMENDED PANEL OPENING .795[20.2] PANEL THICKNESS: .118[3.0] MAX. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 28 www.carlingtech.com Curvette R/RSC-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - Introduction CURVETTE R/RSC-Series SINGLE POLE ROCKER & PADDLE SWITCHES Since its introduction, the Curvette switch has become the barometer for versatility and performance in the switch market. Self cleaning contacts, international approvals, along with a wide variety of circuits, ratings, and actuator options make the Curvette the switch of choice for many markets. Product Highlights: Two color visi rocker to indicate “on” function Ratings to 20A Oval or rectangular bezels Patented mounting wings accommodate a wide range of panel openings Typical Applications: Appliance HVAC Food Service Transportation www.carlingtech.com 29 Curvette R/RSC-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts VDE: 4000V - live to dead metal parts; 750V - across open contacts 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) Electrical Life 100,000 cycles V B RA901 1 Base Part Number 2 Actuator Style B 3 Actuator Color 4 Bezel Color/Style 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING 1 / TERMINATION 10A 250 VAC; 16A 125 VAC; 3/4 HP 125-250 VAC; 10(4) A 250 VACu T85 Solder Lugs .250 Tabs Wire Leads OFF-NONE-ON RA900RA901RA905 ON-NONE-ON RB900RB901RB905 ON-OFF-ON 3 RC910RC911RC915 OFF-NONE-ON 2 RD220RD221RD225 R V Rocker Visi-rocker (2 color) 3 ACTUATOR COLOR 1 Black (gloss) 2 White (gloss) B W Black (matte) White (matte) V 5 Rocker Legend 6 Visi-Rocker End/Legend Color 4 BEZEL COLOR / STYLE STANDARD B Black (matte) W White (matte) OVAL 1 Black (gloss) 2 White (gloss) 5 ROCKER LEGEND molded in NO LEGEND 0 Off-On vertical 1 Off-On horizontal 2 I-O horizontal 8 I-O vertical 9 dual OFF-ON/I-O n/a 15A 250 VAC; 20A 125 VAC; 3/4 HP 125-250 VAC Solder Lugs .250 Tabs OFF-NONE-ON RSCA200RSCA201 ON-NONE-ON RSCB200RSCB201 2 ACTUATOR STYLE M Momentary Rocker P Paddle 9 hot stamp 0 A B D E H 6 VISI-ROCKER END / LEGEND COLOR N N/A B Black V Visi-red W White Notes: PC Terminals also available, consult factory for details. 1 For additional ratings, consult factory. 2 Rating is 8A 250 VAC, 12A 125 VAC, 1/2 HP 125-250 VAC, and must specify M actuator style. 3 Not rated at 3/4 HP 125-250 VAC ( ) indicates momentary function. .125[3.18] DIA 6.000[152.40] .250[6.35] .375[9.52] .080[2.03] .250 TAB (Q.C.) .500[12.70] .187[4.75] .250[6.35] SOLDER LUG WIRE LEAD TERMINAL TYPE 1.125[28.58] .187[4.75] .725[18.41] MOMENTARY .550[13.97] .350[8.89] 1.070[27.17] .375[9.53] .710[18.03] .620[15.75] PADDLE TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL .480[12.19] 1.072[27.23] MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .025 min - .187 max. Specific cutout dimension range dependent on panel thickness and material. Consult factory. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 30 www.carlingtech.com Curvette LRA-Series Lighted Rocker and Paddle Switches - Introduction CURVETTE LRA-Series SINGLE POLE LIGHTED ROCKER & PADDLE SWITCHES Since its introduction, the Curvette switch has become the barometer for versatility and performance in the miniature switch market. This lighted version features the very same self cleaning contacts, international approvals, along with a wide variety of circuits, ratings, and actuator options that make the Curvette the switch of choice for various applications. Product Highlights: Clear or translucent style rockers Neon or Incandescent illumination Self-cleaning wiping style contacts UL, CSA and VDE approved www.carlingtech.com Typical Applications: HVAC Office Lighting Transportation Commercial Food Lawn & Garden Power Strip 31 Curvette LRA-Series Lighted Rocker & Paddle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V-live to dead metal parts VDE: 4000V - live to dead metal parts; 750V - across open contacts 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) Electrical Life 100,000 cycles LRA911 1 Base Part Number B / 250N R S 2 Actuator Style 3 Actuator Color 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING 2 / TERMINATION 125 neon lamp (use 125N in Selection 5 Lamp Voltage) 10A 250VAC; 16A 125VAC; 10(4)A 125VACu Solder Lugs .250 Tabs Wire Leads OFF-NONE-ON LRA210LRA211LRA215 250 neon lamp (select 250N in selection 5 Lamp Voltage) 15A 250 VAC; 10A 250VAC; 16A 125VAC; 10(4)A 250 T85 Solder Lugs .250 Tabs OFF-NONE-ON LRA910LRA911LRA915 Incandescent lamp (select 006V-024V in selection 5 Lamp Voltage) 10A 30V Solder Lugs .250 Tabs Wire Leads OFF-NONE-ON LRA510LRA511LRA515 4 Bezel Color/Style 5 Lamp Voltage 3 ACTUATOR COLOR translucent AAmber CWhite P Yellow SRed W Pale Red clear AAmber CClear G 1Green B 1 Blue RRed 4 BEZEL COLOR/STYLE STANDARD B Black (matte) W White (matte) OVAL 1 Black (gloss) 2 White (gloss) 5 LAMP VOLTAGE 006V 6 volts incandescent 012V 12 volts incandescent 018V 18 volts incandescent 024V 24 volts incandescent 1 125N 125 volts neon 250N 1 250 volts neon 2 ACTUATOR STYLE P Paddle R Rocker translucent C Rocker Clear Notes: LED illumination, PC terminals, independent lamps, and additional color options are available. Consult factory. 1 Neon lamps not available with blue or green actuators. 2 Consult factory for additional ratings. .125[3.18] DIA 6.000[152.40] .250[6.35] .080[2.03] .375[9.52] .250[6.35] .250 TAB (Q.C.) .187[4.75] SOLDER LUG .500[12.70] WIRE LEAD TERMINAL TYPE 1.125[28.58] .187[4.75] .710[18.03] .550[13.97] .725[18.41] 1.070[27.17] .375[9.53] .620[15.75] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL .480[12.19] PADDLE 1.072[27.23] MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .025 min. - .187 max. Specific cutout dimension range dependent on panel thickness and material. Consult factory. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 32 www.carlingtech.com RG-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - Introduction RG-Series RG-Series SINGLE/DOUBLE POLE ROCKER & PADDLE SWITCHES The double pole version of the R-Series incorporates the same sleek lines as the original Curvette, in a double pole envelope. Features include silver-plated butt-action contacts which afford ratings to 20A/125, 15A 250VAC and withstand peak inrush currents up to 100 amps. Paddle or rocker actuators and a choice of solder lug, .250 Tab and wire lead terminations enable this switch to adapt to high current applications. Product Highlights: Ratings to 20A UL, CSA and VDE approved Rocker or Paddle actuators Fits Euro or American standard mounting holes www.carlingtech.com Typical Applications: Power Supply Appliance Exercise Equipment Music Equipment 33 RG-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Electrical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity VDE: 4000V - live to dead metal parts; 1250V - opposite polarity & across open contacts 50,000 cycles Mechanical Life 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature -40°F to 185°F (-40°C to 85°C) RGSCA901 1 Base Part Number 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING 1 / TERMINATION 15A 250 VAC, 20A 125 VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250 VAC, 14(6)A 250 VAC Solder Lugs .250 Tabs Wire Leads Standard Base OFF-NONE-ON (Single Pole)RGSCA900RGSCA901RGSCA905 ON-NONE-ON (Single Pole) RGSCB900RGSCB901RGSCB905 OFF-NONE-ON (Double Pole)RGSCC900RGSCC901RGSCC905 ON-NONE-ON (Double Pole)RGSCD900RGSCD901RGSCD905 European Base (22 x 30 mm cutout) OFF-NONE-ON (Single Pole)RGSEA900RGSEA901RGSEA905 ON-NONE-ON (Single Pole) RGSEB900RGSEB901RGSEB905 OFF-NONE-ON (Double Pole)RGSEC900RGSEC901RGSEC905 ON-NONE-ON (Double Pole)RGSED900RGSED901RGSED905 2 ACTUATOR STYLE P Paddle B R 2 Actuator Style R Rocker B 3 Actuator Color A 4 Bezel Color 5 Rocker Legend 3 ACTUATOR COLOR 1 B Black W White 4 BEZEL COLOR 1 B Black W White 5 ROCKER LEGEND hot stamp NO LEGEND 0 OFF-ON vertical A OFF-ON horizontal B I-O horizontal D I-O vertical E Dual OFF-ON, I-O vertical H Dual OFF-ON, I-O horizontal J Notes: 1 Additional ratings, colors and clear style actuators are available. Consult factory. .125[3.18] X .150[3.81] 19 .250[6.35] 1.012[25.70] .500[12.70] .187[4.75] PADDLE 1.145[29.08] .250 TAB (Q.C.) .215[5.46] 1.240[31.50] SOLDER LUG WIRE LEAD TERMINAL TYPE .784[19.91] .080[2.03] 6.000[152.40] .275[6.99] 1.181[30.00] 1.125[28.58] +.000[.00] -.004[.10] +.004[.10] -.000[.00] .866[22.00] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL .872[22.15] 1.000[25.4] 1.180[29.97] 1.072[27.23] .375[9.53] .725[18.42] 1.070[27.17] 1.176[29.87] RGSC RGSE RGSE 1.086[27.58] RGSC MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .025 min - .187 max. Specific cutout dimension range dependent on panel thickness and material. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 34 www.carlingtech.com LRG-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - Introduction LRG-Series LRG-Series ILLUMINATED DOUBLE POLE ROCKER & PADDLE SWITCHES The double pole lighted version of the R-Series incorporates the same sleek lines as the original Curvette, in a double pole envelope. This illuminated version features silver-plated butt-action contacts with ratings to 20A/125, 15A 250VAC and withstand peak inrush currents up to 100 amps. Clear or translucent style rocker actuators and a choice of solder lug, .250 Tab and wire lead terminations enable this switch to adapt to high current applications. Product Highlights: Ratings to 20A Neon or Incandescent Illumination Silver Plated Butt-contact mechanism Clear or translucent style rockers Typical Applications: Power Supply Appliance Exercise Equipment Music Equipment www.carlingtech.com 35 LRG-Series Rocker & Paddle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature -40°F to 185°F (-40°C to 85°C) Electrical Life 50,000 cycles LRGSCK611 B R S 1 Base Part Number 2 Actuator Style 3 Actuator Color B / 250N 4 Bezel Color 5 Rocker Legend 6 Lamp Voltage 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING 1 / TERMINATION 15A 250 VAC, 20A 125 VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250 VAC 4 BEZEL COLOR 1 B Black Solder Lugs Standard Base OFF-NONE-ON LRGSCK610 European Base (22 x 30 mm cutout) OFF-NONE-ON (Single Pole) LRGSEK610 15A 6-24 V 3 Standard Base OFF-NONE-ON LRGSCK510 European Base (22 x 30 mm cutout) OFF-NONE-ON (Single Pole) LRGSEK510 5 ROCKER LEGEND hot stamp NO LEGEND 0 OFF-ON vertical A OFF-ON horizontal B I-O horizontal D I-O vertical E Dual OFF-ON, I-O vertical H Dual OFF-ON, I-O horizontal J .250 Tabs Wire Leads LRGSCK611 LRGSCK615 LRGSEK611LRGSEK615 LRGSCK511 LRGSCK515 LRGSEK511LRGSEK515 2 ACTUATOR STYLE R Rocker (translucent) C 3 ACTUATOR COLOR AAmber B 3,5 Blue C 4White/Clear G 5Green L 3 Lime Green P Yellow R Red (clear) SRed W Pale Red Rocker (clear) W 6 LAMP VOLTAGE 2 006V 6V incandescent 012V 12V incandescent 018V 18V incandescent White 024V 125N 250N 24V incandescent 125V neon 250V neon Notes: 1 Additional ratings, colors and clear style actuators are available. Consult factory. 2 Incandescent lamps must specify 15A 24V rating only. 3 Available with incandescent lamps only. 4 Clear color provided where specified with clear style rocker. 5 Available with clear style rocker only. .125[3.18] X .150[3.81] 6.000[152.40] .275[6.99] .250[6.35] 1.145[29.08] .250 TAB (Q.C.) .080[2.03] SOLDER LUG WIRE LEAD TERMINAL TYPE .784[19.91] .215[5.46] 1.240[31.50] .500[12.70] .187[4.75] 1.181[30.00] 1.125[28.58] +.000[.00] -.004[.10] +.004[.10] -.000[.00] .866[22.00] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL .872[22.15] 1.000[25.4] 1.180[29.97] 1.072[27.23] .375[9.53] .725[18.42] 1.070[27.17] 1.176[29.87] RGSC RGSE LRGSE 1.086[27.58] LRGSC MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .025 min - .187 max. Specific cutout dimension range dependent on panel thickness and material. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 36 www.carlingtech.com 610/620-Series Small-Sized Rocker Switches - Introduction 610/620 610/620-Series SMALL-SIZED ROCKER SWITCHES The 610/620-Series switches are double insulated and available in single or double pole configurations. These snap-in mounted switches are offered with either a paddle or rocker actuator and with ratings up to 8 amps. Product Highlights: Single or double pole Paddle rocker actuator options Snap-In mounting method Typical Applications: Handheld Appliance Audio-Visual Power Supplies Computers www.carlingtech.com 37 610/620-Series Small-Sized Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity Mechanical Life Electrical Life 50,000 cycles- single pole 50,000 cycles- double pole Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 100,000 cycles 62012421 1 Base Part Number 0 0 2 Terminal Sealing 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING 1 / TERMINATION 1 4A 250VAC; 8A 125VAC Single Pole Solder Lugs PC Term On-none-On 62011421 62011422 On-none-(On) 62011431 62011432 On-off-On 62011461 62011462 On-off-(On) 62011471 62011472 (On)-off-(On) 62011481 62011482 Double Pole On-none-On 62012421 62012422 On-none-(On) 62012431 62012432 On-off-On 62012461 62012462 On-off-(On) 62012471 62012472 (On)-off-(On) 62012481 62012482 3 Legend 2 TERMINAL SEALING 0 None E Epoxy sealed terminals 3 LEGEND NO LEGEND On-OFF vertical On-OFF horizontal I-O horizontal I-O vertical hot stamp 0 A B D G Notes: 1 Base part number specifies black rocker and bezel. To specify paddle actuator, change 2nd digit of part number from 2 to 1 (ex. 61012421) For additional ratings and colors, consult factory. ( ) indicates momentary function. .078[1.98] .171[4.34] .250[6.35] .284[7.21] .046[1.17] x .029[.736] .750[19.05] .590[14.98] PC TERMINAL END CENTER .080[2.03] X .047[1.19] SLOT .080 SOLDER LUG .182[4.62] .620[15.74] TERMINAL TYPE .510[12.95] .050[1.27] .515[13.08] .606[15.39] .500[12.70] .171[4.34] BARRIER .300[7.62] .625[15.87] .250[6.35] .750[19.05] PADDLE MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .030[.762] min. to .093[2.36] max. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 38 www.carlingtech.com 611/621-Series Small-Sized Rocker Switches - Introduction 611/621 611/621-Series SMALL-SIZED ROCKER SWITCHES The 611/621-Series small-size, sleek styling, actuator and termination choices make this switch a cost effective solution to most any switching need. International approvals, single or double pole circuitry, and ratings to 11A 125VAC further the broad appeal of this product family. Product Highlights: Single or double pole Paddle and single color or dual color visi-rocker options UL, CSA and VDE approvals for select circuits Choice of 7 termination options www.carlingtech.com Typical Applications: Appliance Audio-Visual Power Supplies 39 611/621-Series Small-Sized Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Electrical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity VDE: 4000V - live to dead metal parts; 1250V - opposite polarity & across open contacts 50,000 cycles- single pole 50,000 cycles- double pole Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) Mechanical Life 100,000 cycles 62116919 0 1 Base Part Number 2 Epoxy Sealing 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING 2 / TERMINATION 187 Tabs 4 .080 Solder Lugs PC Terms Wire Leads Single Pole; 4A 250VAC; 8A 125VAC; 6(4) A 250V 4 ON-NONE-OFF 62116919 - - 62111914 ON-NONE-ON 62116929 62116421 62111422 62111924 ON-OFF-ON 3 - 62111461 62111462 62111263 7 ON-NONE-(ON) 3 - 62111431 62111432 62111233 7 ON-OFF-(ON) 3 - 62111471 62111472 62111273 7 (ON)-OFF-(ON) 3 - 62111481 62111482 62111283 7 Double Pole; 4A 250VAC; 8A 125VAC; 6(4) A 250V 4 ON-NONE-OFF 62115919 - - ON-NONE-ON 62115929 62115420 62112422 ON-OFF-ON 3 - 62112461 62112462 3 ON-NONE-(ON) - 62112431 62112432 3 ON-OFF-(ON) - 62112471 62112472 (ON)-OFF-(ON) 3 - 62112481 62112482 2 TERMINAL SEALING 0 None E 9 62112914 62112924 62112263 7 62112233 7 62112273 7 62112283 7 V 3 Rocker Legend 4 Visi-Rocker End Color PC Front Mount PC Back Mount .187 Solder Lugs 621111918 6 621111828 6 62111917 6 62111927 6 - - - - 62111916 62111926 - 621122918 6 621122928 6 - - - - 62112917 6 62112927 6 - - - - 62112916 62112926 - - - - - 3 ROCKER LEGEND Epoxy sealed terminals NO LEGEND Off-On vertical Off-On horizontal I-O horizontal I-O vertical O on rocker radius Notes: 1 Base part number specifies black rocker with black bezel. To specify paddle actuator change 2nd digit from 2 to 1. ex.: 61115919 = black paddle with black bezel. For additional ratings & colors, consult factory. 2 Dry circuit rating is available, consult factory. 3 Not available with 6(4) A 250 V rating or VDE approval. 4 6(4)A 250V VDE approved rating available with On-none-Off and On-none-On circuits only. 5 Available with visi-rocker option only. 6 Consult factory for PC footprint. 7 Rated 2A 250VAC, 5A 125 VAC resistive. ( ) Indicates momentary function. molded in 5 hot stamp 0 0 n/a A n/a B 8D 9E n/a F (Indicates ON) 4 VISI-ROCKER END COLOR Nn/a V visi-red W visi-white .171[4.34] .825[20.95] .125[3.18] .080[2.03] .207[5.26] .590[14.98] END .380[9.65] .200[5.08] .062[1.57] DIA MIN .250[6.35] CENTER .046[1.17] x .029[.736] .185[4.70] .080[2.03] X .047[1.19] SLOT .080 SOLDER LUG (terminal option 1) functions 2,3,6,7,8 .877[22.27] .892[22.66] .677[17.20] HIGH BARRIER OPTION .843[21.41] .080 SOLDER LUG P.C. (option 2) TERMINAL TYPE .187[4.74] X .032[.812] .505[12.83] PC TERMINAL FRONT MOUNT & MOUNTING PATTERN (terminal option 2) functions 2,3,6,7,8 .120[3.05] DIA .315[8.00] 6.000[152.40] .500[12.70] .825[20.95] .465[11.81] .187 TAB (Q.C) (terminal option 9) functions 1,2 WIRE LEAD .187 SOLDER LUG (terminal option 6) functions 1,2 PADDLE 1.040[26.42] TAB PANEL X Y THICKNESS .030[.762]-.060[1.52] .508[12.90] .756[19.20] .060[1.52]-.093[2.36] .508[12.90] .764[19.40] .093[2.36]-.156[3.96] .508[12.90] .780[19.81] +.000[.00] -.004[.10] Y X +.004[.10] -.000[.00] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 40 www.carlingtech.com 622/632-Series Small-Sized Rocker Switches - Introduction 622/632 622/623-Series SMALL-SIZED ROCKER SWITCHES A high powered offering packed into a small-sized envelope, the 622/632-Series is a staple of numerous markets. With its silver-alloy butt contacts, the 622/632 will handle inrush spikes up to 100 amps and steady state current to 12A 125VAC. The lighted 632-Series features a multitude of illumination circuit options available with LED, incandescent and neon style lamps. Product Highlights: Illuminated or Non-Illuminated Silver Plated Butt contacts that handle high Inrush spikes Independent or Dependent lamp circuitry Industry standard size mounting hole www.carlingtech.com Typical Applications: Appliance Food Service Transportation General Purpose 41 622/632-Series Small-Sized Rocker Switches - General & Dimensional Specifications, Ordering Scheme Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V-live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) Electrical Life 50,000 cycles 1 B 632121 1 Base Part Number 2 Actuator Color BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 8A 250VAC; 12A 125VAC; 1/2 HP 125-250VAC 622-SERIES NON-ILLUMINATED ROCKER ON-none-OFF (Single Pole) ON-none-OFF (Double Pole) 632-SERIES ILLUMINATED ROCKER ON-none-OFF (Single Pole, dependent lamp) schematic 1 ON-none-OFF (Single Pole, independent lamp) schematic 3 ON-none-OFF (Single Pole, independent lamp unballasted) schematic 5 ON-none-OFF (Double Pole, dependent lamp with 5 terms.) schematic 2 ON-none-OFF (Double Pole, dependent lamp with 4 terms.) schematic 4 3 ACTUATOR COLOR 3 622 (non illuminated) B Black W White W 4 Lamp 5 Legend Solder Lugs 622121 622221 .187 Tabs 622122 622222 632121 632321 632521 632221 632421 632122 632322 632522 632222 632422 4 LAMP VOLTAGE / STYLE 1 N 622 (non illuminated) 1 unballasted LED 2 6V LED 3 12V LED 4 24V LED 632 (illuminated) 1 Clear Amber 2 Clear Red 3 Clear Blue 2 4 Clear Green 5 Clear 3 BASE COLOR 3 B Black K N 3 Base Color A C E H J K 6V incandescent 12V incandescent 18V incandescent 24V incandescent 125V neon 250V neon 5 ROCKER LEGEND N NO Legend A OFF-ON vertical B OFF-ON horizontal D I-O horizontal E I-O vertical F O on rocker radius White Notes: 1 For all incandescent or LED lamps specify 5 in 5th digit of part number. Example 632151-1B-CN 2 Available with incandescent lamps only. 3 Additional colors available. Consult factory for details. .125[3.17] DIA .187[4.74] X .032[812] .150[3.81] .590[14.99] .825[20.96] .315[8.00] .405[10.29] .080[2.03] .187 TAB (Q.C) .630[16.00] .945[24.00] .187 SOLDER LUG TERMINAL TYPE .315[8.00] A +.004[.10] -.000[.00] RECOMMENDED PANEL OPENING .505[12.83] 632 SCHEMATIC +.000[.00] -.004[.10] UNBALLASTED 1 2 3 B 5 6 BOTTOM VIEW OF TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT 1 1 1 2 2 5 +2 5 2 5 2 +3 +3 6 3 6 +3 6 3 1 1 2 3 1 4 PANEL THICKNESS +5 5 A B .030[.76]-.050[1.27] .508[12.90] .756[19.20] .050[1.27]-.078[1.98] .508[12.90] .764[19.40] .078[1.98]-.125[3.17] .508[12.90] .780[19.81] *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 42 www.carlingtech.com 651/652-Series Small-Sized Rocker Switches - Introduction 651/652 651/652-Series SMALL-SIZED ROCKER SWITCHES This switch is ideal for applications with back panel size constraints. It fits in a standard rectangular cutout and is designed to provide ease of insertion along with superior panel retention qualities. A high profile rocker and butt-action contacts provide the user with a crisp positive-type feel and electrical ratings to 12A 125VAC 10A 250VAC. A variety of ratings, circuitry and termination choices will appeal to many market segments. Product Highlights: Ratings to 12A 125VAC, 6A 250VAC Suitable for low voltage 12/24V DC Solid or 2 color visi-rocker options 5 choices of termination www.carlingtech.com Typical Applications: Handheld Appliance Audio-Visual Power Supplies 43 651/652-Series Small-Sized Rocker Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V-live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 100,000 cycles- maintained 50,000 cycles- momentary 50,000 cycles- T-rating B B 651 122 1 Series 2 Circuit/Rating/ Termination 1 SERIES 651 652 Matte Finish 3 Actuator Color A N 4 Base Color 5 Legend 6 Visi-Rocker End/ Legend Color 4 BASE COLOR 2 CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 10A 250VAC, 10A 125VAC, 1/4 HP, 125-250 VAC .187 .187 PC Solder Lugs Tabs Terms ON-NONE-OFF 121 122123 (ON)-NONE-OFF 2611 262263 ON-NONE-(OFF) 3611 362363 ON-NONE-ON 421 422423 ON-NONE-(ON)5611 562563 ON-OFF-ON 6812 682683 2 ON-OFF-(ON) 781 782783 2 (ON)-OFF-(ON) 881 882883 Black B Gloss Finish W White 5 ROCKER LEGEND PC Rt. Angle 124 264 364 424 564 684 784 884 Wire Leads 125 265 365 425 565 686 785 885 molded in4 NO LEGEND 0 Off-On vertical 1 Off-On horizontal – I-O horizontal8 I-O vertical 9 O on rocker end – II-O-I vertical – II-O-I horizontal – hot stamp 0 A B D E F G H 6 VISI-ROCKER END / LEGEND COLOR N B V W 3 ACTUATOR COLOR B Black W White N/A Black Visi-red White Notes: Additional ratings (including 14V T) & color options are available; Consult factory. 1 Rated 12A 125VAC, 6A 250 VAC, 1/4HP 125-250VAC. 2 Rated 8A 125-250VAC, 1/4HP 125-250VAC. 3 Additional colors available. Consult factory for details. 4 Available with Visi-Rocker option only. ( ) Indicates momentary function. .080 [2.03] .215 .825[20.96] .590[14.99] .289[7.34] .222[5.63] .085[2.16] DIA .050 .236 [5.99] .735 [18.67] .188 [4.77] x.032 [.81] .050 PC TERMINAL FRONT AND RIGHT ANGLE SOLDER LUG .460[11.68] .270 [6.86] .507 [12.88] TERMINAL TYPE .720 [18.29] 2 POSITION .187[4.74] X .032[.812] .080 [2.03] .825[20.96] .270 [6.86] TYP .062 [1.57] DIA TYP .590[14.99 ] .236 [5.99] .835 [21.21] .188[4.77] x.032[.81] PANEL THICKNESS .500[12.70] .270[6.86] .720 [18.29] 3 POSITION .507 [12.88] PC TERMINAL HOLE PATTERN .187 TAB (Q.C) RECOMMENDED PANEL OPENING A +.000[.00] -.004[.10] B .030[.76]-.050[1.27] .508[12.90] .756[19.20] .050[1.27]-.078[1.98] .508[12.90] .764[19.40] .078[1.98]-.125[3.17] .508[12.90] .780[19.81] B A +.004[.10] -.000[.00] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 44 www.carlingtech.com V-Series V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Introduction V-Series CONTURA SWITCHES Carling Technologies’ sealed V-Series Contura switches are well known for their cutting edge design, high quality, maximum performance and unmatched reliability. These switches are a staple in the marine and transportation industries and have passed a range of environmental, corrosion, temperature, vibration, shock and sealing tests including MIL Std 202F, MIL Std 810C, UL 1500, ISO 8846, IEC 60529 and BS 5490 among others, making them one of the most rugged and reliable switches ever manufactured. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Certified to IP66 with dual seals around lamps and rocker stem. Silver plated butt contact mechanism provides reliability up to and beyond 100K electrical cycles Greaseless construction withstands temperature extremes down to -40˚C The switch accommodates up to 10 terminals and endless illumination and circuit options. The switch connector allows the user to preload FQC terminals for ease of assembly. Numerous choices of removable rockers allow for style change without having to retest or re-qualify the switch base. www.carlingtech.com Typical Applications: Marine Panels Emergency Vehicles Trucks Buses Construction Equipment Motorcycles & ATVs Farm Equipment Commercial Appliances Military Vehicles Mining Equipment Golf Carts Floor Cleaning Equipment Utility Vehicles 45 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Design Features V-Series Switch DESIGN FEATURES INTERCHANGEABLE ACTUATORS Panel redesign is a snap with our wide range of rocker styles. Achieve maximum design variety with minimum inventory. Simply swap rockers to create an entirely new look for your panel. OPTIONAL PANEL SEAL Prevents water/dust ingress behind panel. 46 DUAL SEAL PROTECTION Seals out water, dust, debris, and enables switch certification to IP66 for front panel components. MULTIPLE LIGHTING OPTIONS In addition to Incandescent lamps, our LED illumination is offered in a wide array of light intensities, colors, as well as dual level, tri-color, and flashing options. CLEAN CONNECTIONS Options for both eight and ten terminal base styles with AMP & Packard compatible connectors affords myriad circuit options while providing ease of assembly. BRASS ROLLER PIN Robust mechanism eliminates the need for lubricants. Enables switch to withstand -40°C to +85°C temperatures. SILVER PLATED BUTT CONTACT MECHANISM Providing 50k to 100k electrical cycles and a variety of different electrical ratings. www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Actuator Options & Accessories Contura II & III Contura X Contura IV Contura XI Contura V Contura XII Contura VI (WAVE) Contura XIV Contura VII Illuminated Indicators & Accessories The Contura II & III actuators are constructed of thermoplastic polycarbonate and are offered with a hard nylon overlay or a “soft-touch” elastomer overlay. These models incorporate aesthetic designs on the top and bottom of the rocker featuring two rows of raised “bumps” on the Contura II and three “indented” lines on the Contura III. The Contura IV’s “Shape to create a Shape” actuator works with the curves, contours & advanced styling of the latest panel designs, flowing with these advanced curves & radii. This actuator style fits on the Contura flush bracket/bezel. The symmetrically curved Contura V actuator provides the perfect complement to the Contura IV’s “Shape to create a Shape” design concept. With its flush style mounting bracket, Contura V can be mounted in between two Contura IV’s, by itself, or in groups. The Contura VI WAVE sealed rocker switches, when used in a row, create an uniquely appealing “wave” design on your panel. A variety of colors and finishes are available for both rocker and wave insert. Contura VI features bar and oval lenses. Contura VII featuring gently curved corners and edges assuring compatibility with most any panel design. Intuitive feel is maximized by the use of 2 embossed circular pads located at opposite ends of the rocker. Any combination of Bar or Oval style lenses can be located in the pads providing a truly unique look, exclusive to Contura VII. www.carlingtech.com The raised bracket/bezel on the Contura X helps prevent inadvertent actuation of the rocker, as well as preventing debris from being trapped under the actuator. This curved rocker style is available with a variety of lenses and legends. The raised bracket/bezel on the Contura XI helps prevent inadvertent actuation of the rocker, as well as preventing debris from being trapped under the actuator. This convex style rocker is available with a wide variety of lenses and legends. The Contura XII version features a paddle style actuator with the raised bracket/bezel of Contura X and XI. The contoured handle design provides intuitive recognition and ease of operation and is available with all Contura X and XI lens and legend offerings. The Contura XIV represents a sleek new crossover rocker design which should appeal to Trucks, Buses and Heavy Vehicles as well as the Marine Industry. Intuitive feel is provided by recessed ridges along with a Center Groove which effectively defines the boundary between top and bottom switch functions. Alert operator of systems functions or malfunctions, are offered with removable/replaceable lamps in Contura II, II, V or X styles. Accessories include connectors, mounting panels, hole plugs, panel seals, and actuator removal tools. Refer to accessories page for full details 47 V–Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - General Specifications Electrical Contact Rating .4VA @ 24VDC (MAX) resistive 15 amps, 125VAC 10 amps, 250VAC 1/2 HP 125-250VAC 20 amps, 4-14VDC 15 amps, 15-28VDC 10A, 14VT 6A, 125VAC L Dielectric Strength 1500 Volts RMS Insulation Resistance 50 Megohms Initial Contact Resistance 10 milliohms max. @ 4VDC Life 50,000 - 100,000 cycles circuit dependent Contacts Silver alloy, silver tin-oxide, fine silver Terminals Brass or copper/silver plate 1/4” (6.3mm) Quick Connect terminations standard. Solder lug, Wire Lead Mechanical Endurance 150,000 cycles minimum circuit dependent Physical Lighted Incandescent - rated 10,000 hours Neon - rated 25,000 hours LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life (LED is internally ballasted for voltages to 24VDC) Seals Internal Optional external gasket panel seal Base Polyester blend rated to 125°C with a UL flammability rating of 94V0. Contura II,III,IV,V, Hard Surface: Basic actuator VI, VII Actuator structure molded of thermoplastic polycarbonate with a hard Nylon 66 thermoplastic surface overlay. Soft Surface: Basic actuator structure molded of thermoplastic polycarbonate with an elastomer overlay. Contura X,XI,XII Actuator,VP Nylon 66 Reinforced rated to 105°C Lens Polycarbonate rated at 100°C Contura XIV Polycarbonate lens/sub-rocker with ABS shell Actuator Travel (Angular Displacement) 2 position 3 positions 18° 9° from center Mounting Specifications Agency Certifications Environmental Sealing Sealed version: IP66, this rating applies to front panel components of the actual switch only, and signifies complete protection against dust as well as powerful jets of water. Corrosion Mixed Flowing Gas (MFG) Class III 3 year accelerated exposure per ASTM B-827, B-845 Silver and gold contacts Operating Temp. -40°C to +85°C Vibration 1 Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 204D Test Condition A 0.06 DA or 10G’s 10-500 Hz. Tested with VCH connector. Test criteria - No loss of circuit during test, pre and post test contact resistance. Vibration 2 Resonance search 24-50 Hz 0.40 DA 50-2000 Hz ±10 G’s peak Horizontal Axis 3-5 G’s max. Random 24 Hz 0.06 PSD-Gsq/Hz 60 Hz 0.50 100 Hz 0.50 200 Hz 0.025 2000 Hz 0.025 No loss of circuit during test; <10μ seconds chatter. Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 213B, Test Condition K @ 30G’s. Tested with VCH connector. Test criteria - No loss of circuit during test, pre and post test contact resistance. Salt Spray Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 101D, Test Condition A, 96 Hrs. Sealed version only. Dust Per Mil-Std 810C, Method 510.2 Air Velocity 300 ±200 Feet/Min, Test Duration 16 Hrs. Thermal Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 107F, Test Cond. A, -55°C to +85°C. Test criteria pre and post test contact resistance Moisture Resistance Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 106F, Test Criteria - pre and post test contact resistance Ignition Protection All Contura switches with sealed construction meet the requirements of UL1500/ISO8846 for ignition protection, in addition to conformance with EC directive 94/25/EC for marine products. .830[21.08] Panel Thickness Range Gaskets Acceptable Panel Thickness 0 .030 to .250 (.76 to 6.35mm) TEST CUT IN 1.450[36.83] HOLE 1 .030 to .109 & .147 to .157 ACTUAL MATERIAL (.76 to 2.77mm & 3.73 to 3.98mm) Recommended: No gasket with panel SWITCH thickness of .032, .062, .093, .125,.187 or .250 MOUNTING HOLE 48 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura II & III - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B T 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 8 Bracket 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONE OFF 2B (ON) NONE OFF 3C ON NONE (OFF) 4D ON NONE ON 5F ON NONE (ON) 6J ONOFF ON 7K ON OFF (ON) 8L (ON) OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 3 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 10 Lens 11 Color 12 Legend 0 00 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbright superbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H 9 ACTUATOR 0 No Actuator A, B Contura II C, D Contura III Actuator orientation above terminals: 10 LENS 0 - No Actuator ClearWhite Amber 1 6 8 2 7 C 3 8 D 4 9 E 5 A F Z - No Lens Green Red G M H N J P K R L S 3,6 1,4 Blue T U V W Y Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) www.carlingtech.com A R B 00 9 Actuator 11 ACTUATOR COLOR 1 AND TEXTURE 0 - No Actuator Black Gray Red White Soft Surface BGRW Hard Surface CHSY 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS 2 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 Body legends not available on Soft surface actuators; White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 4 Contura II available with two square lenses. Consult factory for details. 49 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura II & III Locking - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A S W 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lock 7 Lamp 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONE OFF 4D ON NONE ON 6J ON OFFON 7K ON OFF (ON) 8L (ON) OFF (ON) 9N OFF NONE ON SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. A Z E 00 8 Bracket 9 Actuator 10 Lens 11 Function 0 12 Legend 13 Legend Orientation 7 LAMP Lamp above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbright superbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H 9 HARD SURFACE ACTUATOR 1 Black Gray Red White Contura II A BGH Contura III C DEF Actuator orientation above terminals: 3,6 1,4 10 LENS Z - No Lens ClearWhite Amber Green Red Blue 3 8 D J P V Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY MR 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 11 ACTUATOR LOCK FUNCTION AND COLOR 1 Lock Color Up Down Up & Down Center 3 Match Actuator A HR 1 Black BJ S 2 White CK T 3 Red DL V 4 Safety Orange EM W 5 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend 21 22 23 24 OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 21-28 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 ORIENTATION 1 ORIENTATION 4 ORIENTATION 2 AZC45-1 AZC45-2 6 LOCK Lock above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch W lock 45 45 ORIENTATION 3 Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Only available with 3 position circuits. Center OFF and special circuits only available with center position lock function. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 50 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura IV - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B T 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 8 Bracket 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 123 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONE OFF 2B (ON) NONE OFF 3C ON NONE (OFF) 4D ON NONE ON 5F ON NONE (ON) 6J ONOFFON 7K ON OFF (ON) 8L (ON) OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 10 Lens 11 Color 12 Legend 0 00 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbright superbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D P JV * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H 9 ACTUATOR 0 No Actuator E Contura IV, left orientation T Contura IV, left orientation, laser etched F Contura IV, right orientation R Contura IV, right orientation, laser etched Actuator orientation above terminals: 10 LENS 0 - No Actuator ClearWhite Amber 1 6 8 2 7 C 3 8 D 4 9 E 5 A F Z - No Lens Green Red G M H N J P K R L S 1,4 3,6 Blue T U V W Y EF Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) www.carlingtech.com E P C 00 9 Actuator 11 ACTUATOR COLOR 1,5,6 No Actuator 0 Black C White Y Nickel D Gray H Pewter E Red S 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS 2 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 ORIENTATION 1 ORIENTATION 4 E8C45-100 E3C70-200 F8C45-100 F3C70-200 ORIENTATION 2 E8C45-300 F8C45-300 ORIENTATION 3 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Gloss brow is on left side of E actuator and right side of F actuator. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Laser etched rocker only available with lens code Z & actuator colors black, nickel or pewter. 6 Pewter and nickel colors only available with laser etched actuator. 51 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura V - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B T 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1 A ON NONE OFF 2 B (ON) NONE OFF 3 C ON NONE (OFF) 4 D ON NONE ON 5 F ON NONE (ON) 6 J ONOFF ON 7 K ON OFF (ON) 8 L (ON) OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 9 Actuator 10 Lens 11 Color Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 12 Legend 0 00 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbright superbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H 9 ACTUATOR 0 No Actuator G Contura V P Contura V, laser etched 10 Lens 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens style & location: #1 / #2 ClearWhite Amber Green Red Blue 1 6 8 G M T bar 2 7 C H N U bar/bar 3 8 D J P V oval 4 9 E K R W oval/bar 5 A F L S Y oval/oval Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 11 ACTUATOR COLOR 1,3,5 No Actuator 0 Black C White Y Nickel D 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 52 G P C 00 8 Bracket Gray H Pewter E Red S 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS 2,6 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL ORIENTATION 1 4G13L ORIENTATION 4 4G MC MA 4G MA MC 3L ORIENTATION 2 4G200 MA3MC MA1MC ORIENTATION 3 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Laser Etched rocker only available with lens code Z & actuator colors black, nickel or pewter. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Nickel and Pewter colors only available with laser etched actuator. 6 Consult factory for laser etched lens callout. www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura IV & V Locking - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A S W 0 B 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lock 7 Lamp 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT 3 Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONE OFF 4D ON NONE ON 6J ONOFF ON 7K ON OFF (ON) 8L (ON) OFF (ON) 9N OFF NONE ON 3 RATING 4 1 B C D E F M N .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive 15A 24V 20A 18V 20A 12V 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) .4VA/20A 12V .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 9 Actuator 10 Lens 11 Function Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No high profile lock Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Only available with 3 position circuits. Center OFF and special circuits only available with center position lock function. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Located at T3-6 end of switch. 6 Contura V style only. 12 Legend 0 13 Legend Orientation 7 LAMP Lamp above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbright superbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H 9 HARD SURFACE ACTUATOR CONTURA IV: Orientation Black Gray Red White Left J K L M Right NPR S CONTURA V: Orientation Black Gray U V 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY MR 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 6 LOCK Lock above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch. W low profile lock Y 6 J Z E 00 8 Bracket Red W Actuator orientation above terminals: 3,6 1,4 Actuator orientation above terminals: 3,6 1,4 White Y 10 LENS 5 Z - No Lens Clear White Amber Green Red Blue A B C D E F bar lens G H J K L M oval lens Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 11 ACTUATOR LOCK FUNCTION AND COLOR 1 Lock Color Up Down Up & DownCenter 3 Match Actuator A HR1 Black BJ S2 White CKT 3 Red DL V4 Safety Orange E M W5 Gray F GN6 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend 21 22 23 24 OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 JHAY3-100 ORIENTATION 1 JHAY3-200 JHAY3-300 ORIENTATION 2 2 Circuit ORIENTATION 4 1 Series P P P P P P NHAY3-100 www.carlingtech.com NHAY3-200 NHAY3-300 ORIENTATION 3 53 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura VI WAVE - Ordering Scheme V 1 D B G N T B 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 8 Bracket 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONE OFF 2B (ON) NONE OFF 3C ON NONE (OFF) 4D ON NONE ON 5F ON NONE (ON) 6J ONOFF ON 7K ON OFF (ON) 8L (ON) OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 11 Lens 12 Color 13 Insert Color 14 Actuator Lens 1 00 15 16 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 7 LAMP Lamp above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbright superbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H 9 ACTUATOR 0 No Actuator H High Insert 10,11 LENS 4 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens Clear White Amber Green Red – 7 C H N 3 – D J P 4 – E K R – A F L S 12 ACTUATOR COLOR C Black H Gray Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No L Low Insert Blue U Bar Lens Translucent V Bar Lens Transparent W Oval Lens Transparent Y Oval Lens Translucent 13 INSERT COLOR B Black C Bright Chrome Plated D Satin Chrome Painted S Red Y White N Bright Nickel Plated S Satin Chrome Plated T Satin Nickel Plated W White 14 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS 2 00 - No Legend this location/No actuator 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 15 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 Orientation 1 VTHAACN-MC1MC VTHA7CN-3M100 VTHWZCB-45146 VTLSZSC-70100 Orientation 2 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 54 10 Lens Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 3 RATING 3 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. H A 7 C B AC 9 Actuator Orientation 4 1 Series VTLLFHC-A813H VTLDECC-001MG Orientation 3 16 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators. Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura VII - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B T 0 B 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 8 Bracket 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1 A ON NONE OFF 2 B (ON) NONE OFF 3 C ON NONE (OFF) 4 D ON NONE ON 5 F ON NONE (ON) 6 J ONOFF ON 7 K ON OFF (ON) 8 L (ON) OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 11 Color 0 00 12 Legend 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (same coding for both selections) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbright superbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H ACTUATOR ORENTATION ABOVE TERMINALS 9 ACTUATOR 0 No Actuator Z Contura VII 3,6 1,4 STANDARD 10 LENS Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens White Amber Green Red Blue Lens style & location 6 B G MT 7 C H NU 8 D J PV 9 E K RW A F L SY 1 2 3 45 ORIENTATION 3 11 ACTUATOR COLOR/THUMB PRINT COLOR 1 O N/A - No Actuator C Black/Black H Grey/Black S Red/Black Y White/Black ORIENTATION 4 ORIENTATION 3 ORIENTATION 1 14 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS 2 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. ORIENTATION 1 AA AA 46 46 3AA-146 ORIENTATION 2 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 ORIENTATION 4 Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) www.carlingtech.com 10 Lens ORIENTATION 2 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. Z R C 00 9 Actuator ORIENTATION 4 3 Rating ORIENTATION 1 2 Circuit ORIENTATION 2 1 Series 3AA-246 ORIENTATION 3 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators. Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 4 Legends available for lighted oval lens version only 55 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura X, XI & XII - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B 6 0 1 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 123 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONE OFF 2B (ON) NONE OFF 3C ON NONE (OFF) 4D ON NONE ON 5F ON NONE (ON) 6J ONOFFON 7K ON OFF (ON) 8L (ON) OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 6 P Z 00 8 Bracket Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 10 Lens 11 Lens 12 Legend 0 00 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (same coding for both selections) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbright superbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL (EXTERNAL FOAM GASKET) X & XI with Flush Bracket X, XI, XII with Raised Bracket # of gaskets0 1 2 0 1 Black B C D 1 4 White WY Z 2 5 Gray GH J 3 6 9 ACTUATOR No Actuator 0 Black Gray White Red Contura X 1 23 4 Contura XI 6 78 9 Contura XII J K N M Actuator orientation above terminals: 3,6 1,4 10 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #1 TERMINALS 1,4 11 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #2 TERMINALS 3,6 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens Clear White Amber Green Red Blue Lens Style 3 8 D J PVBar 4 9 E K RW One piece Square 5 A F L SYTwo piece Square* (With clear top protective lens) 2 7 C H NUTwo piece Square* (With smoke top protective lens) 1 6 B G MTTwo piece Square* (With white top protective lens) * All bottom lenses are molded of opaque material. Consult factory for other lens colors. Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend this location/No actuator 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O OFF ON O I 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F 21 22 23 24 OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 3 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 6ZZ3G-100 6FFMA-4MC MA 3G ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL ORIENTATION 1 ORIENTATION 2 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 9 Actuator ORIENTATION 4 1 Series 70 G3 A7 MC MA 6ZZ3G-1A7 6FFMA-3MC MC 6FZ70-100 ORIENTATION 3 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red & gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 With 2 square lenses, use selection 12 for lens above lamp 1, & selection 14 for lens above lamp 2. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Not available with Contura XI rockers. 56 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura X Locking - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A S W 0 1 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lock 7 Lamp 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONE OFF 4D ON NONE ON 6J ON OFFON 9N OFF NONE ON SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY MR1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 6 LOCK Lock above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch. W Lock Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators; Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Located over T1-4 end of switch. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Located over T3-6 end of switch. 1 P B 00 8 Bracket 9 Actuator 10 Lens 11 Function 12 Legend 0 13 Legend Orientation 6,7 LAMP (same coding for both selections) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbright superbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No Gasket1 2 3 One Gasket4 5 6 9 HARD SURFACE ACTUATOR Black 1 Contura X Grey 2 Red 3 White 4 Actuator orientation above terminals: 3,6 1,4 10 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #2 TERMINALS 5 Z - No Lens Clear White Amber Green Red Blue Lens Style 3 8 D J PV Bar 4 9 E K RWOne piece Square 5 A F L SY Two piece Square* (with clear top protective lens) 27CHN U Two piece Square* (with smoke top protective lens) 1 6 B G MT Two piece Square* (with white top protective lens) * All bottom lenses are molded of opaque material. Consult factory for other lens colors. Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 11 ACTUATOR LOCK FUNCTION AND COLOR 3 Lock Color Up Down Up & Down Match Actuator A HR Black BJ S White CKT Red DL V Gray E MW Safety Orange F NY 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend 21 22 23 24 OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Orientation 1 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 3 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 Orientation 4 Orientation 4 4 Orientation 2 1PM4F-1 45 4F MC Orientation 3 18K45-2 13DMC-1 www.carlingtech.com 57 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura XIV - Ordering Scheme V 1 D B B C 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 8 Bracket 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONE OFF 2B (ON) NONE OFF 3C ON NONE (OFF) 4D ON NONE ON 5F ON NONE (ON) 6J ON OFFON 7K ON OFF (ON) 8L (ON) OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 3 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 34 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 9 Actuator 10 Lens 11 Actuator Color 1 00 12 Legend 13 14 Legend Actuator, Orientation Lens Legends 6 & 7 LAMP No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbright superbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 BRACKET COLOR & PANEL SEAL Color No Gasket 1 Gasket 2 Gasket BlackB C D GrayG H J White W YZ 9 ACTUATOR STYLE 0 No Actuator - Furnished separately FA Contura XIV FB Contura XIV - Laser Etched 10 LENS COLOR / STYLE 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens Clear White Amber Green Red 1 6 B G M 2 7 C H N 3 8 D J P 4 9 E K R 5 A F L S 5 A N/A N/A N/A Blue T U V W Y N/A PAD Printed Laser-Etched Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S NONE – – A 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) K 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) M 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) N 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) P 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) U 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) 58 FA P C AB 11 ACTUATOR COLOR 1 O N/A - No Actuator C Black SRed YWhite 12 ACTUATOR LENS or BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend this location/No actuator 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 1 2 3 4 14 ACTUATOR / LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. 3 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. www.carlingtech.com V–Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura II, III, & IV - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] www.carlingtech.com 59 V–Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura V, VI & VII - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] CONTURA V CONTURA V SHOWN WITH BAR LENS SHOWN WITH LOW PROFILE LOCK 1.922 [48.56] 1.922 [48.56] 1.079 [27.40] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIERS .505 [12.83] .250 [6.35] X .031 [.78] .250 [6.35] X .031 [.78] .250 [6.35] X .031 [.78] .390 [9.90] .960 [24.38] 2.029 [51.53] SWITCH SHOWN WITH VCH CONNECTOR 8 TERMINAL 60 1.000 [25.40] .960 [24.38] .960 [24.38] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 8 7 8 7 1 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 3 6 3 6 10 9 BOTTOM VIEW TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT 8 TERMINAL BASE BOTTOM VIEW TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT 10 TERMINAL BASE 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 0.985 [25.02] .250 [6.35] .031 [.78] .820 [20.83] .820 [20.83] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIERS 1.922 [48.82] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIER AND LAMP TERMINAL 1.020 [25.91] .505 [12.83] SHOWN WITH LARGE LENS AND BAR LENS 1.126 [28.60] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 1.020 [25.91] CONTURA VII SHOWN WITH OVAL LENS 1.950 [49.53] .080[2.03] 1.479 [37.57] 1.550 [39.37] CONTURA VI SWITCH SHOWN WITH VC1 CONNECTOR 10 TERMINAL .820 [20.83] .960 [24.38] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS SWITCH SHOWN WITH VC1 CONNECTOR 10 TERMINAL www.carlingtech.com V–Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura X, XI, XII & XIV - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] CONTURA X SHOWN WITH RAISED BRACKET CONTURA XI CONTURA XII CONTURA XIV SHOWN WITH RAISED BRACKET AND TWO SQUARE LENSES SHOWN WITH PADDLE ACTUATOR SHOWN WITH LARGE LENS 1.928 [48.97] .350 [8.89] .667 [16.94] 1.910 [48.51] 1.910 [48.51] .426 [10.82] .350 [8.89] 1.586 [40.28] .573 [14.56] 1.305 [33.15] 1.506 [38.25] 1.370 [34.79] 1.370 [34.79] 1.370 [34.79] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIERS 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 8 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS .960 [24.38] .960 [24.38] .970 [24.64] .960 [24.38] .780 [19.81] .780 [19.81] .780 [19.81] .250 [6.35] X .031[.78] .390 [9.90] .390 [9.90] .820 [20.82] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIERS SWITCH SHOWN WITH VCH CONNECTOR 8 TERMINAL www.carlingtech.com .390 [9.90] .820 [20.82] .820 [20.82] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIERS .960 [24.38] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 8 1 7 4 8 7 1 4 2 5 2 5 3 6 3 6 10 9 BOTTOM VIEW TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT 8 TERMINAL BASE .820 [20.83] BOTTOM VIEW TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT 10 TERMINAL BASE SWITCHES SHOWN WITH VC1 CONNECTOR 10 TERMINAL 61 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - II to XIV - Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagrams: CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 3 1 3 2 3 5 3 3 5 3 6 2 1 3 4 2 1 2 6 3 4 2 6 4 1 1 6 5 3 3 6 5 3 2 6 5 6 G SYMBOL LEGEND SYM. 2 3 S 2 7 6 5 2 F 1 5 2 5 3 1 2 6 R 2 6 4 3 5 E 3 6 M 2 1 4 5 3 1 5 D 5 3 L 2 3 5 2 C 1 1 6 2 4 6 K 2 3 4 2 B 1 3 J 2 3 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1 6 A 2 CIRCUIT 2 5 DEFINITION DESIGNATES TERMINALS AND CONTACTS DESIGNATES LAMP LOCATION 1 3 3 4 DESIGNATES MAINTAINED CIRCUITS DESIGNATES OTHER POSITION 8 H DESIGNATES MOMENTARY CIRCUITS DESIGNATES TWO POSITION CONNECTION 2 62 2 5 DESIGNATES EXTERNAL JUMPER PROVIDED BY CUSTOMER www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - II to XIV - Lamp Circuit Diagrams, Hazard Warning Circuit Diagrams Lamp Circuit Diagrams: LAMP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM LAMP CIRCUIT +8 +8 A/1 1 -7 1 +3 +3 SPECIAL #1 +3 2 2 M/R +1 +3 -4 2 H/Z SPECIAL #3 +1 +3 2 J/8 2 2 1 N/T SPECIAL #4 +3 1 2 -7 +3 -8 1 +6 1 +8 -6 -7 -7 2 -7 +8 2 +6 1 +8 -6 +3 -7 C/3 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM -6 1 L/9 LAMP CIRCUIT -7 1 G/7 +3 +6 1 +1 +3 -4 P/V 2 -6 1 2 -7 -7 +8 +1 +3 E/5 -6 2 +8 -7 D/4 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM -7 +3 B/2 +3 1 F/6 LAMP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1 2 K/W +6 1 U/Y 2 (-)7 -7 +8 +10 1 2 -7 -9 Hazard Warning Circuit Diagrams: CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1 17 18 10(-) 3 J1 1 2 11 13 5 3 14 CIRCUIT 8 10(-) J5 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1 3 2 2 5 1 5 3 11 13 3 14 11 13 3 14 15 12 JJ 6 16 JK 1 5 6 8 J3 2 8 17 18 10(-) 3 3 14 NOTE: J circuits are available for all non-locking V-Series styles. Consult factory for p/ n details. JA 1 5 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 11 13 17 18 17 18 10(-) J2 1 CIRCUIT 8 17 18 10(-) SYMBOL LEGEND 1 J4 SYM. DEFINITION DESIGNATES TERMINALS AND CONTACTS DESIGNATES LAMP LOCATION 2 5 www.carlingtech.com 63 V-Series Contura Rotary Switch - Introduction Rotary V-Series CONTURA ROTARY SWITCHES The V-Series Contura Rotary Switch was designed for maximum performance and reliability leveraging the features of the widely popular V-series Contura Rocker Switches. Available in maintained and momentary circuit options, the V-Series Rotary features a sturdy knob construction, up to three separate LEDs, and fits in an industry standard panel opening. Internally, the V-Series Contura Rotary uses a patented mechanism that translates rotary to linear motion. This allows for common switch functionality and terminal connections with the V-Series rocker version and requires no harness change. A secondary CAM, which helps drive the mechanism, provides definitive detent positions and prevents the switch from stopping between positions, while improving tactile feel. The V-Series Rotary also features an innovative PC board that supports the LED and surface mount resistors; and IP67 sealing protection above panel by utilizing LED and actuator stem seals. Together, these features make the V-Series Contura Rotary switch the best choice available in the market today. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Accommodates up to three separate LEDs Patented mechanism translates rotary into linear motion Secondary CAM for definitive detent positions PC Board supports LED and surface mount resistors IP67 sealing protection above panel Common terminal & circuit functionality with V-Series Rocker switches, with no harness change required 64 Typical Applications: On/Off Highway Equipment Marine Test & Measurement Instrumentation Speed Control www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Rotary Switch - Design Features V-Series Rotary Switch DESIGN FEATURES OPTIONAL PANEL SEAL Prevents water/dust ingress behind panel LEDS Up to three separate LEDs www.carlingtech.com SEALS LED and stem seals provide IP67 protection above panel ROTARY & LINEAR ACTUATOR Patented mechanism that translates rotary to linear motion PC BOARD Supports LEDs and surface mount resistors TERMINALS Same pinout as V-Series Rocker Switches, requiring no harness change SECONDARY CAM Provides definitive detent positions with ball & spring located in rotary actuator 65 V-Series Contura Rotary Switch - General Specifications Electrical Mechanical Rating Circuit Voltage Max Current Resistive 2 Position Maintain 2 Position Momentary 3 Position All 2 Position Maintain 2 Position Momentary 12 12 12 24 24 20 20 20 15 15 3 Position All 24 15 Dielectric Strength 1500 Volts RMS Insulation Resistance 50 Megohms Initial Contact Resistance 10 Milli Ohm max @ 4VDC Life 50,000 Cycles Two Position 25,000 Cycles Two Position Momentary and All Three position Terminals 0.250” (6.3mm) Quick Connect Physical Function Circuits Double Pole Single Throw, DPST Double Pole Double Throw, DPDT Operation Two and Three Position Maintained and Momentary Knob Rotation Two Position 60 Degrees Three Position 30 Degrees from Center Illumination LED; Red, Green, Amber, Yellow, White, Blue Seals LED O-ring(s) – Silicone, Bezel gasket – Neoprene, Knob seal - NBR Flammability Exceeds FVMSS 302 Requirements, Exterior Components, UL 94 V-2 or Better Interior Components, UL 94 HB or Better Base Polyester, PBT Bracket Nylon 66, PA Knob Polybutylene Terephthalate, PBT 6.5%GF Lens Polycarbonate, PC Connector Nylon 66, PA Mounting Front Panel Snap In, 1.450” (36.83mm) X 0.830” (21.08mm) Panel Thickness, 0.030” – 0.187” (0.76 – 4.75mm) Mechanical Life Knob Impact Environmental Sealing Dust Corrosion Chemical Splash Salt Spray Vibration Random Vibration Sinusoidal Shock Handling Shock Thermal Shock Moisture Resistance Thermal Cycling Ignition Protection UV Protection ESD 100,000 Cycles Maintained Circuits 50,000 Cycles Momentary Circuits 50 Gram weight dropped from a height of 18 inches on Top & Sides IP67, in accordance with IEC 60529, BS 5490, DIN 40050 & NFC 20 010. This rating applies to front panel components of the actual switch only, and signifies protection against dust and the prolonged effects of immersion under pressure. Mil STD 810, Method 510.2 Air Velocity 300 Ft/Min Duration 16Hr IEC 68-2-60 Mixed Flowing Gas (MFG) 14 Days Gasoline, Diesel, Motor Oil, Brake Fluid, Ammonia, Armour All Mil STD 202G, Method 101, Test Condition A 96 Hr Mil STD 202G, Method 214 test Condition C 10G’s RMS Mil STD 202G, Method 204D, Test Condition A 0.06DA or 10G’s 10-500Hz MIL-STD 202G, Method 213B Test Condition K, 30G’s 1 Meter Drop onto Hard Surface MIL-STD 202G, Method 107G Test Condition A -55 C to 85 C MIL-STD 202G, Method 106F 10, 25 C to 65 C Cycles 95% RH 25 Cycles -40 C to 85 C ISO 8846 with EC Directive 94/25/EC for Marine Products 300 hr Xenon Arc, 1.4W/m2 wavelength 420 nm Human Static Discharge, +/- 15KV applied during normal operation Shipping/Handling, frequency range 200-2000 MHz applied voltage is +8KV to +15KV and -8KV to -15KV 3 discharge cycles *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 66 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Rotary Switch - Ordering Scheme RV 21 D 2 B 6 0 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 1 7 Lamp 2 8 Lamp 3 9 Bracket K R C 10 Actuator 11 Lens 12 Knob Color 3 RATING 1 .4VA 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V D 20A 12V 5 ILLUMINATION 6, 8 Sealed Lamps S NONE A # 1 B # 1 C # 1 & # 3 D # 1 & # 3 E # 1 # 2 # 3 F # 1 # 2 # 3 G # 1 # 3 H # 2 J # 1 # 2 K # 1 # 2 L # 1 # 2 M # 2 # 3 N # 2 # 3 P # 2 # 3 R # 3 T # 3 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 Term 10 Term TerminationJumper 1 2 .250 TAB (QC) - no barriers No AB .250 TAB (QC) - with barriers No J 4, 5K 4, 5 .250 TAB (QC) - no barriers Yes (T2 to T5) 6, 7, 8 LAMP #1, 2 AND OR LAMP #3 6, 8 Selection 6: above terminal 7; Selection 8: above terminal 8 No lamp 0 LED Red Amber Green Blue White 12VDC CN H E 6 24VDC DP J K 8 1 SERIES RV Rotary Contura 2 CIRCUIT 1 Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary from bottom of switch: 8 - - 7 DP - double pole uses 1, 2, 3 and 4, 5, 6. 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position:1 2 3 DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 21 ON NONE OFF 22 (ON) NONE OFF 23 ON NONE (OFF) 24 ON NONE ON 26 ON OFF ON 28 (ON) OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS 55 (ON) OFF ON 61 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3, 4 & 5 1 & 2, 4 & 5 62 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF 64 (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF Notes: 1 Switch circuit uses terminals 1,2,3,4,5 & 6. Terminals 7,8,9 & 10 are for lamp circuit only. 2 Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for Circuits 61, 62, & 64 to be specified in the Termination & Jumper selection. 3 Circuit 61 may be used for SP, OFF-ON-ON circuit. 4 Base will not have terminal insulating barriers when connector and/or jumpers are used. 5 Code J,K are optional for circuits 62 and 64. Customer may provide externally wired jumper to connect terminals 2 and 5. 6 Lamp #1 located at top end of switch, above terminal 4. Lamp #2 located at top end of switch between terminals 1 & 4. Lamp #3 located at top end of switch, above terminal Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to L.E.D. lamps only. 7 Mounting hole size is 1.450” (36.83mm) by 0.830” (21.08mm). To mount multiple switches in single panel cut-out order optional interlocking mounting panels. 8 Lens color for L.E.D.s must be clear, white, or match color of L.E.D. when illuminated Terminals Independent Dependent Independent Independent Dependent Dependent Independent Independent Independent Dependent Independent Dependent Dependent Independent Independent Independent Independent Dependent Dependent Dependent Independent Independent Independent Dependent Dependent Independent Dependent Independent Dependent 8+ 3+ 8+ 10+ 3+ 1+ 8+ 9+ 10+ 3+ 9+ 1+ 3+ 8+ 8+ 8+ 10+ 3+ 1+ 3+ 8+ 8+ 10+ 3+ 1+ 10+ 1+ 8+ 1+ 77777777777777777777777777777- 9 BRACKET COLOR & PANEL SEAL 7 Color No Gasket 1 Gasket 2 Gasket Black BC D Gray GH J White WY Z 10 ACTUATOR STYLE K Rotary Knob (Standard) ACTUATOR ORIENTATION ABOVE TERMINALS 4 1 11 LENS COLOR 8 No Lens Z Clear White Amber Green Red Blue 4 9E KRW 12 KNOB COLOR Black Gray Red White C HS Y www.carlingtech.com 67 V-Series Contura Rotary Switch - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1.400 [35.56] 1.700 [43.18] .845 [21.47] 1.079 [27.40] 1.550 [39.37] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/ BARRIERS .960 [24.38] 1.126 [29.24] .250 [6.35] X .031[.78] .353 [8.64] .820 [20.83] .960 [24.38] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 8 7 1 4 2 5 3 6 10 9 BOTTOM VIEW TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT 10 TERMINAL BASE SWITCH SHOWN WITH VC1 CONNECTOR 10 TERMINAL 1.266 [32.16] 1.318 [33.48] 68 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Rotary Switch - Circuit Diagrams Circuits Diagrams: LEGEND SYMBOL DEFINITION TERMINAL LOCATION MAINTAINED CIRCUIT MOMENTARY CIRCUIT INTERNAL CONNECTION (JUMPER TERMINAL) 2 POSITION CONNECTION 2 POSITION CONNECTION P1 P3 2 POSITION P1 P2 P3 3 POSITION www.carlingtech.com 69 V-Series Contura Rotary Switch - Lamp Circuit Diagrams Lamp Circuit Diagrams: 70 www.carlingtech.com V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger– Introduction V-Charger V-Charger V-SERIES DUAL PORT USB 2.0 CHARGERS Carling Technologies USB V-Charger is designed to charge tablets, e-readers, mobile and gaming devices, digital cameras, as well as other compatible electronic devices. Providing a total current of 3.15 amps, the V-Charger delivers fast charging times even in extreme temperatures from -40˚C to +80˚C. This innovative product safeguards its electronics with integrated over-current and thermal overload protection, as well as optional load dump circuitry, assuring prolonged safe and reliable operation. The center LED indicates charging is in progress. Snap-in mounting for an industry standard 1.450” x .830” panel cutout makes installation easy. *Additionally, the V-Charger’s double torsion spring-loaded access doors automatically close and provide effortless IP64 sealing protection with precision-fit silicone rubber seals. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Dual USB Charging Ports 3.15 Amps for Faster Charging 10,000 Operating Cycles per Port IP64 Sealing Protection 12-24 V Operating Voltage Protection for Internal Components Typical Applications: On/Off-Highway Equipment Golf Carts Lawn & Garden Equipment Marine Military www.carlingtech.com 71 V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger - Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger V-Charger DESIGN FEATURES DUAL USB 2.0 PORTS Total current of 3.15 amps, facilitating faster charges SEALING PROTECTION Silicone rubber seal perfectly mates with door indent to provide IP64 level of sealing protection 72 SPRING LOADED DOORS Stylish, wing-shaped double doors automatically close to cover and seal each port when not in use PANEL SEAL Prevents water ingress beneath panel to protect critical connections LED Green LED brightens to indicate charging is in progress MOUNTING Fits industry standard panel opening size of 1.450” x .830” www.carlingtech.com V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger - General Specifications Electrical USB Type 2.0 Number of USB Ports 2 Operating Voltage 12V/24V DC power systems (9 to 29 VDC) Output Voltage 5 VDC ± 5% Max Output Current 3.15A DC Total Current Draw (No Load) 12V: 0.8 mA, 24V: 1.9 mA LED Indicator Green LED brightens when charging is in progress. Compatibility Charges mobile devices including iPad, iPhone, iPod, HTC, Galaxy, Blackberry, MP3 Players, Digital Cameras and PDA’s Life 10,000 operating cycles per port minimum Terminals Copper/silver plating 1/4” (6.3 mm) Quick Connect terminations Reverse Polarity Operational with correct polarity after reverse polarity exposure ESD 15kV air, 8 kV touch Overcurrent Protection Short Circuit Thermal Overload Protection Operation will cease if internal temperature reaches 125°C. Charging will resume after sufficient heat loss Physical Panel Opening Panel Thickness Panel Mounting Method Seals Depth Behind Panel Connection Weight Styling Port Protection 1.450” x .830” .030 - .156 inches Front Panel Insertion Silicone and Poron See Figures 1 and 2 VC1, VC2 55g (0.12 lbs) Curved USB port doors Twin, self-closing doors Environmental Sealing IP64 for front panel components when USB Ports are covered Operating Temperature -40° to +60°C at 3.15A -40° to +70°C at 2.4A -40° to +80°C at 2.1A Vibration 1 Mil-Std 202G, Method 204D, Test Condition A. 0.06DA or 10G, 10-500 Hz Shock Mil-Std 202G, Method 213B, Test Condition K @ 30-G. No loss of circuit during test. Chemical Splash Brush method with USB doors closed: diesel, gasoline, brake fluid, Windex, Armor All Thermal Shock MIL-Std 202F, Method 107D, Test Condition A, -55° to +85°C. Test Criteria: Remains functional without damage Moisture Resistance Mil-Std 202G, Method 106G. Test Criteria: Remains functional without damage Thermal Cycling 25 Cycles -40° to +85°C, 2 hours for each temperature every cycle Salt Spray Mil-Std 202G, Method 101E, Test Condition A Dust Mil-Std 841C Method 510.2 Air Velocity 300 ± 200 Ft/min, test duration: 16 Hr Mechanical Endurance 10,000 door cycles minimum *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 73 V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger - Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Ordering Scheme V 1 Series USB 2 Product Type 24 3 Source Voltage G 1 1 4 LED Indicator 5 Circuit Protection 6 Termination 1 SERIES V 6 TERMINATION 1 .250 Tab 2 PRODUCT TYPE USB Charger 7 DOOR STYLE 1 Curved 3 SOURCE VOLTAGE 24 24 / 12 Volts DC 8 DOOR COLOR B Black 4 LED INDICATOR (VOLTAGE MATCHES SOURCE) G Green 9 FRAME COLOR B Black 5 CIRCUIT PROTECTION 1 Reverse Polarity, Thermal Overload & Overcurrent 10 PANEL SEAL 1 Yes 1 B B 1 7 Door Style 8 9 10 Door Color Base Color Panel Seal Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] NEGATIVE ( – ) POSITIVE ( + ) Notes: 1 Charger to install into 1.450” X 0.830” panel opening 74 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Stand-Alone Components Reduce inventory levels and cost by stocking actuators and base switches separately. Contura II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, X, XI, XII, XIV Base switches separately: specify V with code selections 2-8 in the ordering schemes. Contura II, III, IV, V Actuator only: VV with code A or C for selection 9, & with selections 10-14 in the ordering schemes. Contura VI Actuator with lenses and inserts only: VV with code selections 9-16 Contura II, III, IV, V, VII Actuator only: VV with code A, C, E, G, P or Z for selection 9 & with selections 10-14 in the ordering schemes. Contura X, XI, XII, XIV actuators with lenses separately: VV with code selections 9-14 in the ordering schemes. Panel Seal: VPS Contura X & XI actuators without lenses separately: VVP J 1 Z 21 1 00 VVR 6 1 00 1 1 Actuator Separately 2 3 Actuator Lens Style/Color Opening 4 Actuator Legend Contura XII actuators without lenses separately: 5 Legend Orientation 1 Actuator 2 Style & Color 3 Lens Opening 4 Lens Opening 6 7 Legend Legend Orientation 5 Legend 1 CONTURA X & XI ACTUATOR SEPARATELY VVR 1 CONTURA XII ACTUATOR SEPARATELY VVP 2 ACTUATOR STYLE & COLOR Black Gray White Red Contura X 1234 Contura XI 6789 2 ACTUATOR STYLE & COLOR J Black K Gray N White M Red 3,4 LENS OPENING FOR Z No lens 1 Bar lens Square lens 3 LENS OPENING FOR 1 1 One bar lens 2 One bar lenses 3 One square lens 4 two square lens square lens on top/ bar lens on bottom (Contura X only) 5 4 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 00 - No Legend this location 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O OFF ON O I 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 5 LEGEND ORIENTATION 1 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 5, 7 LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend 21 22 OFF ON 2 Color posts mount toward actuator stem 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL 6 LEGEND ORIENTATION 3 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 ORIENTATION 1 ORIENTATION 2 ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL ORIENTATION 1 Contura X, XI & XII actuator lens assembly separately: ORIENTATION 4 VVL 2 1 00 0 ORIENTATION 2 1 Lens Separately top lens bottom lens } 3 Lens Color 4 Legend 5 Legend Orientation 2 LENS STYLE 3 1 Bar lens 2 One Piece Square lens 3 Bottom of Two-Piece Square lens 5 1 TOP OF LENS SEPARATELY VVT 2 COLOR 1 Clear 2 Smoke 2 Lens Style 1 CONTURA X, XI & XII LENS SEPARATELY VVL 3 White 3 TRANSLUCENT LENS COLOR 1 Clear2 White3 Amber4 Green 45 Red6 Blue 4 Contura X, XI & XII actuator lens assembly: actuator stem 24 I Contura X, XI & XII top piece of 2-piece lens separately: 1 Lens Separately 23 O ORIENTATION 3 VVT 1 2 4 LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend 21 22 OFF ON two piece lens assembly 23 O 24 I 1 piece lens/bar lens are positioned the same as bottom lens for assembly, minus the top lens. Lenses snap in from bottom. Notes: 1 If actuator lens opening for 2 bar or 2 square lenses, legend orientation 0,1, or 2 must be chosen. 2 Center of actuator marking not available for Contura XII. 3 Legend is not available for bar style lens. 4 Not recommended with neon lamps. 5 Must also order top piece of 2 piece square lens separately. 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 5 LEGEND ORIENTATION 3 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL ORIENTATION 1 ORIENTATION 4 ORIENTATION 2 ORIENTATION 3 www.carlingtech.com 75 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Accessories Easily integrate Contura products into your system, with Contura Accessories Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE PART NO Contura Connectors COMPANY SERIES WIRE RANGE TIN GUIDE PLAIN Q.C. SELECTION AWG PLATED BRASS PART NO BRASS (REF) WIRE RANGE 12 02965580 COMPANY SERIES ORIENTATION MM 2 3.0 ORIENTIN 02965471 (2)16-14 2GUIDE PLAIN TATION Q.C. SELECTION Q.C.12010601 SELECTION GUIDE Q.C. GUIDE MM(2)1.0-2.0 AWGSELECTION PLATED BRASS 02965470 16-14 (REF) 1.0-2.0 BRASS WIRE WIRE WIRE PART NO PART NO PART NO PACKARD 58 SERIES B RANGE .5-.8 RANGE 02965469 06288318RANGE 02965580 12 20-18 ORIEN3.0 COMPANY COMPANY ORIENTIN TIN 102TIN 5.0 12084590 2 SERIES PLAIN SERIES PLAIN PLAIN TATION TATION 02965471 PLATED 12010601 (2)16-14 (2)1.0-2.0 AWG MM AWG MM AWG MM 2 PLATED PLATED BRASS BRASS12052224 BRASS (REF) 3.0 BRASS BRASS 02965470 BRASS 16-14 12 1.0-2.0(REF) B (REF) COMPANY SERIES PACKARD 58 SERIES ORIENTATION TANG 02965580 0296558012015870 12 12 3.0 16-14 1.0-2.0 06288318 1202965580 20-18 3.0 .5-.8 3.0 PACKARD 02965469 12010601 12010601 12010601 (2)1.0-2.0 02965471 (2)16-14 (2)16-14 (2)1.0-2.0 02965471 (2)16-14 02965471(2)1.0-2.0 12020035 (2)22-18 (2).5-.8 A METRI-PACKPACKARD PACKARD PACKARD 10 1.0-2.0 5.0 B1.0-2.0 12084590 Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE 02965470 02965470 16-14 02965470 16-14 16-14 B 1.0-2.0 B SERIES58 SERIES 58630 SERIES 58 SERIES TANG 12015869 20-18 .5-.8 12015832 12052224 12 .5-.8 02965469 06288318 02965469 20-18 06288318 02965469 20-18 062883183.0 .5-.8 20-18 .5-.8 WIRE PART NO RANGE 12052222 20-22 .35-.5 12015870 16-14 5.0 1.0-2.05.0 10 10 10 5.0 12084590 12084590 12084590 TANG SYMBOL = SHOWS ORIENTATION OF TANG IN SLOT PACKARD COMPANY ORIENTANG TANG TANG TIN12052224 12052224 12 (2)22-18 3.012052224 12 3.0 12 2 PLAIN TATION METRI-PACK SERIES 12020035 (2).5-.8 A 3.0 1.3-3 AWG 16-12 MM Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE PLATED SYMBOL 60253-2 60253-1 BRASS 12015870 BRASS 16-14 12015870 1.0-2.0 16-14 12015870 1.0-2.0 16-14 1.0-2.0 630PACKARD SERIES AMP PACKARD PACKARD 12015832 12015869 20-18 (2) .5-.8 (2) 1.3 16 (REF) WIRE 250 SERIES METRI-PACK 12020035 1202003512 (2).5-.8 (2)22-18 12020035 A(2).5-.8 (2)22-18 A(2).5-.8B A METRI-PACK 02965580 METRI-PACK PART NO (2)22-18 3.0 12052222 20-22RANGE .35-.5 20-18 630 SERIES 630 SERIES 630 SERIES42100-2 18-14 .8-2 FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 12015869 20-18 12015869 20-18 12015869 .5-.8 12015832 12015832 12015832 TANG SYMBOL = SHOWS ORIENTATION OF TANG IN SLOT COMPANY ORIEN12010601 (2)16-14.5-.8 (2)1.0-2.0 .5-.8 02965471 TIN PACKARD 2 SERIES PLAIN TATION 16-12 1.3-3 12052222 PLATED 20-22 12052222 20-22 12052222 20-22 .35-.5 60295-2 22-18 .3-.9 60295-1 02965470 16-14.35-.5 1.0-2.0 B AWG MM .35-.5 SYMBOL TANG SYMBOL =TANGSHOWS SYMBOL =TANG SYMBOL = ORIENTATION SHOWS OFORIENTATION TANG IN SHOWS SLOT OFORIENTATION TANG IN SLOT OF TANG IN SLOT 58 SERIES 60253-1 BRASS 60253-2 AMP (REF) BRASS 02965469 06288318 20-18 .5-.8 16-12 (2) 1.3-3 16-12 1.3-3 16-12 1.3-3 16 (2) 1.3 SYMBOL SYMBOL SYMBOL 60253-2 60253-2 60253-2 60253-1 60253-1 60253-1 250 SERIES AMPConsult Delphi AMP Packard AMP 12084590 NOTE: and/or Amp on actual part numbers and availability. B (2) 1.3 02965580 12 3.0 10 5.0 (2) 16 (2) 1.3 (2) 16 (2) 1.3 (2) 16 FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 trademark 42100-2 18-14 .8-2 B 250 SERIES SERIES 250 SERIES B B AMP is 250 a registered of AMP Inc. Harrisburg, PA TANG 12010601 (2)16-14 (2)1.0-2.0 12052224 12 3.0 42100-2 18-14 42100-2 .8-218-14 42100-2 .8-218-14 .8-2 FASTIN-FASTON FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 02965471 42100-1 42100-1 Delphi Packard is 02965470 a FASTIN-FASTON registered trademark of Delphi-Packard Systems Warren, Ohio PACKARD 60295-1 60295-2 22-18 .3-.9 Electrical 16-14 1.0-2.0 B 12015870 16-14 1.0-2.0 60295-1 58 SERIES PACKARD METRI-PACK 60295-2 60295-1 02965469 22-18 60295-2 22-18 60295-2 60295-1 .3-.9 06288318 12020035 20-18 (2)22-18 .3-.9 22-18 .5-.8 (2).5-.8 .3-.9 A NOTE: Delphi Packard and/or Amp on actual part numbers and availability. .820[20.83] 630 SERIES NOTE:Consult Consult Delphi NOTE: Packard Consult and/or Delphi NOTE: Amp Packard Consult on actual and/or Delphi part Amp numbers Packard on actual and/or and part availability. Amp numbers on actual and part availability. numbers and availability. 12015869 20-18 .5-.8 12015832 10 5.0 12084590 .820[20.83] AMP a registered registered trademark oftrademark AMP Inc.ofHarrisburg, PA AMP is is a AMP trademark is a registered of AMP AMP Inc. is Harrisburg, a registered AMP PA trademark Inc. Harrisburg, of AMP PAInc. Harrisburg, PA TANG 12052224 12of 3.0 of 12052222 20-22 .35-.5 Delphi Packard Packard is is Delphi a registered Packard trademark is trademark Delphi a registered ofPackard Delphi-Packard trademark is a registered Electrical Delphi-Packard trademark Systems Electrical Warren, Delphi-Packard Systems Ohio Warren, Electrical Warren, Ohio Systems Ohio ORIENTATION OF TANG IN SLOT Delphi a registered of Delphi-Packard Electrical Systems TANGOhio SYMBOL Warren, = SHOWS 12015870 16-14 1.0-2.0 16-12 1.3-3 PACKARD SYMBOL 60253-2 60253-1 AMP .820[20.83] .820[20.83] (2)22-18 (2).5-.8 A METRI-PACK (2) 16 (2) 1.3 .820[20.83] .820[20.83] .820[20.83]12020035 .820[20.83] 250.820[20.83] SERIES B 630 SERIES .820[20.83] 12015869 20-18 .5-.8 12015832 42100-2 18-14 .8-2 FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 12052222 20-22 .35-.5 60295-2 22-18 .3-.9 60295-1 TANG SYMBOL = SHOWS ORIENTATION OF TANG IN SLOT 16-12 1.3-3 SYMBOL NOTE: AMP Consult Delphi Packard Amp on actual part numbers and availability. 60253-1and/or60253-2 .770[19.56] (2) 16 PA (2) 1.3 AMP is a registered trademark of AMP Inc. Harrisburg, 250 SERIES Delphi Packard is a registered trademark Electrical Systems B Warren, Ohio 42100-2 of Delphi-Packard 18-14 .8-2 FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 .920[23.37] 60295-1 .920[23.37] .820[20.83] .920[23.37] A A 22-18 .820[20.83] .920[23.37] .920[23.37] PACKARDPACKARD 630 630 PACKARD 630 VC1 B VC1 B AMP, PACKARD AMP, PACKARD 58 58 PACKARD 630 VC1 VC1 B B .820[20.83] A AMP, 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD AMP, PACKARD 58 58 PACKARD AMP, PACKARD 58 VC1 B VC2 PACKARD 630 B AMPAMP, PACKARD 58 AMP AMP AMPAMP AMP AMP VC2 10 10 3 23 1VC1 1053 630 6729 417VC1 845 56 96 9 10 73 4 2 51 689 10 10 3 3 2 128 1 7104 8 3 5 2 619 8 7 4 28 10 1 38 2 1 784PACKARD .920[23.37] 1.266[32.16] 5 B AMP AMP, PACKARD 58 679 VC2 4 73 45 2 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] .770[19.56] .950[24.13] B 69 15 8 6 A PACKARD 630 VC2 9 .920[23.37] B 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] A VC2 VC2 .820[20.83] B 1.170[29.72] 1.170[29.72] 1.170[29.72] A PACKARD 630 VC2 VC2 PACKARD 630 B 1.170[29.72] A VC2 VC1 .920[23.37] .770[19.56] .770[19.56] .920[23.37] .3-.9 .920[23.37] NOTE: Consult Delphi Packard and/or Amp on actual partAnumbers and availability. A AMP is a registered trademark of AMP Inc. Harrisburg, PA VC2 A A A A A .920[23.37] .920[23.37] PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 Delphi Electrical Systems Warren, Ohio VC1Packard is a registered trademark of Delphi-Packard VC1 PACKARD 630 B 60295-2 .770[19.56] .770[19.56] B A B B B AMP, 58 PACKARD 58AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARDPACKARD 58 AMP, AMP, PACKARD PACKARD 58 630 3 2 1 8 7 3 4 235 1 62 8 1.466[37.24] 1 87 4 .950[24.13] 1.170[29.72] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] A A A 1.170[29.72] PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 .950[24.13] .950[24.13] .950[24.13] PACKARD 630 1.466[37.24] 1.250[31.75] B PACKARD 630 A PACKARD PACKARD 630 630 1.250[31.75] 5 A B B AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD PACKARD 630 58 6 7 4 5 6 7 4 5 6 1.250[31.75]B AMP 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] .770[19.56] 1.250[31.75] AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 10MARKING 3 2 DETAIL 1A 8 MARKING DETAIL 7MARKING 4DETAIL 5DETAIL 69 A 10 3 VC22 1 DETAIL 8 7 4 5 6MARKING 9 MARKING 3 2MARKING 1 8 DETAIL 7 4 5DETAIL 6 MARKING MARKING DETAIL MARKING MARKING DETAIL DETAIL MARKING MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL DETAIL DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING AMP, PACKARD 58 1.466[37.24] AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP A PACKARD 630 FRONT VIEWB MARKING VC1 FRONT VIEW DETAIL 1.266[32.16] FRONT VIEW AMP, PACKARD 58 PACKARD 630 1.466[37.24] REAR VIEW AMP, PACKARD 58 FRONT VIEW VC1 10 3 2 1 8 VC1 CONNECTOR HOUSING 1.266[32.16] CONNECTOR HOUSING FRONT REARVIEW VIEW AMP, PACKARD 58 8 7 4 5 69 VC1 10 3 2 1 VC1 VC1 CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING A MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL A 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] VC1 PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 VC1 FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW VC1 B CONNECTOR HOUSING MARKING DETAIL B 69 1.466[37.24] PACKARD 630 REAR VIEWMARKING FRONT REAR VIEW VIEW .950[24.13] FRONT VIEW DETAIL 1.466[37.24] REAR VIEW B AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP (For AMP terminals only) MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW VC2 AMP CONNECTOR HOUSING MARKING DETAIL (For AMP terminals only) REAR VIEW 10 3 2 1VC2 8 7 4 5 69 CONNECTOR HOUSING VC2 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] CONNECTOR (For AMP HOUSING terminals only) MARKING DETAIL FRONT VIEW AMP Contura X Boot (P/N VB1-01) MARKING DETAIL FRONT VIEW FRONT REAR VIEW VIEW DETAIL 1.170[29.72] REAR FRONT VIEW VIEW MARKING B REAR VIEW DETAIL 1.250[31.75] FRONT VIEW MARKING DETAIL FRONT VIEW 1.050[26.67] VC1 CONNECTOR HOUSING 1.050[26.67] VC2 CONNECTOR HOUSING (For AMP terminals only) MARKING DETAIL B FRONT AMP, PACKARDVIEW 58 3 2 1 8 REAR VIEW MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW AMP, PACKARD 58 10 3 2 1 8 VC2 7 VC2 4 5 69 VCH VC2 VCH 3 VCH 2 1 8 7 4 5 6 CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING A A MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL VCH 1.250[31.75] 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 (For AMP terminals (Foronly) AMP terminals (For only) AMP terminals only) VC2 VC2 VC2 FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW .950[24.13] MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW 5 FRONT VIEW MARKING 1.266[32.16] .920[23.37] FRONT VIEW AMP AMP, PACKARD 58 7 4 A PACKARD 630 VC1 REARFRONT VIEW VIEW REAR B VIEW MARKING DETAIL .920[23.37] MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW CONNECTOR HOUSING MARKING DETAIL B REAR VIEW AMP, PACKARD 58 VCH 7 4 5 6 HOUSING VCH CONNECTOR 1.250[31.75] CONNECTOR HOUSING Additional V-Series Ratings MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW 1.050[26.67] 1 MARKING DETAIL FRONT VIEW MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW VCH CONNECTOR HOUSING .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive VAC 1/2 HP, No Agency Listings 10A 250VAC 1/2 HP, 15A 125 VAC 1/2 HP, UL Recognized, CSA Certified 15A 125VAC 1/2 HP, 12(2)A 125 VAC μ T85 1.050[26.67] 15A 125VAC 1/2VB1-01 HP, 12(6)A 125 VAC T85 72 VB1-01 2.000[50.80] CONTURA X BOOT 2 .757[19.23] .757[19.23] 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 8 10A CONTURA X BOOT 1/2 HP 125-250VAC, 12(2)A 250 VAC μ T85 2.000[50.80] 1.050[26.67].757[19.23] 2 VB1-01 15A 125VAC, 1/2 HP 125-250VAC, 12(6)A 250 VAC T85 9 10A 250VAC, 2.000[50.80] CONTURA X BOOT B VB1-01 15A 24V 2.000[50.80] CONTURA X BOOT C 20A 18V .757[19.23] D 20A 12V .757[19.23] E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuits 1, 4, A, & D only) 3.99 [101.35] 3.99 [101.35] .757[19.23] 3.99 [101.35] F 10A 14V, 6A, 14VT (circuit G only) .757[19.23] GVRT 20A 6V VRT VRT ACTUATOR ACTUATOR ACTUATOR REMOVAL H REMOVAL 20A 3V REMOVAL 3.99 [101.35] .900 [22.86] .900 [22.86] .900 [22.86] TOOL TOOL TOOL L bracket) 15A 10A 250VAC, (For flush (For125 flush VAC, bracket) (For flush bracket) 1/2 HP 125-250 VAC; 6A 125 VAC L M VRT.4VA/20A 12V (combi-contact) ACTUATOR REMOVAL .900 [22.86] TOOL (combination gold/silver contacts for borderline dry circuit applications) (For flush bracket) 3.99 [101.35] N .4VA/15A 24V (combi-contact) 3.99 [101.35] VRT(combination gold/silver contacts for borderline dry circuit applications) 3.99 [101.35] 2.000[50.80] 2.000[50.80] 1.050[26.67] 2.000[50.80] VB1-01 VB1-01 4VB1-01 10A 250VAC 1/2 HP, 15A 125 CONTURA X BOOT CONTURA X BOOT CONTURA X BOOT 1.050[26.67] 51 62 Contura II, III, IV & V Actuator Removal Tool (P/N VRT) TOP TOP TOP INSERT POINTS UNDER INSERT POINTS UNDER INSERT POINTS UNDER ACTUATOR ACTUATOR ACTUATOR HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET ANDHOLD PUSH FLUSH ON BRACKET AND HOLD PUSH FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH IN IN IN TOP TOP TOP TOP INSERT POINTS UNDER ACTUATOR HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH IN TOP TOP TOP INSERT POINTS UNDER ACTUATOR HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH IN TOP TOP 76 ACTUATOR REMOVAL TOOL (For flush bracket) VRT ACTUATOR REMOVAL VRT NOTESACTUATOR .900 [22.86] TOOL REMOVAL Consult factory to determine availability for individual circuits and their HP rating. (For flush bracket) .900 [22.86] TOOL flush with bracket) 1. Not (For avaiable Contura 7 or 14 rocker styles. .900 [22.86] INSERT POINTS UNDER TOP ACTUATOR INSERT HOLD POINTSFLUSH UNDER ON BRACKET AND PUSH IN ACTUATOR HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH TOP IN Ratings 6 - 9 are UL, CSA & VDE certified, require terminations A or B for double pole circuits, & are not available with illumination circuits 4, 8, D, J, N, & T or with wire lead or solder lug terminations. Circuits 1, 4, A, D, H, M & E are not available with rating 6 & 8. Rating 7 & 9 only available with circuits 1, 4, A & D. Circuits 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, K, L are 1/2 HP 250VAC only with rating 8. Ratings 6 & 7 must specify lamp code 1 (125VAC neon). Ratings 8 & 9 must specify lamp code 2 (250VAC neon). Rating L available with circuits 1, 4, A & D only. 2. www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Accessories Contura Mounting Panels Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Contura Hole Plug Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1.450 [36.83] .830 [21.08] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL VHP CONTURA II,III HOLE PLUG 1.240 [31.50] 1.820 [46.23] .430 [10.92] VHP CONTURA II,III HOLE PLUG VH1 STANDARD HOLE PLUG (No wing serrations) (With VC1 connector attached) 2.000 [50.80] VH2 STANDARD HOLE PLUG (With wing serrations) 1.067 [27.10] 1.928 [48.97] VH3 CONTURA IV HOLE PLUG (No wing serrations) VH4 CONTURA IV HOLE PLUG (With wing serrations) DETAIL VIEW VH1,VH3 & VH5 HOLE PLUGS (No wing serrations for ease of removal) 1.020 [25.91] VH5 CONTURA V HOLE PLUG (No wing serrations) www.carlingtech.com VH6 CONTURA V HOLE PLUG (With wing serrations) DETAIL VIEW VH2,VH4 & VH6 HOLE PLUGS (With wing serrations) 77 VP-Series Contura Illuminated Indicator - Introduction VP-Series VP-Series CONTURA ILLUMINATED INDICATORS The Illuminated Indicator is offered with removable/replaceable lamps, Contura styling, and LED illumination. As a critical safety feature, it’s illumination alerts the operator of essential system functions or malfunctions like: oil pressure, high temperature, transmission or other fluid levels, parking brake, or general system malfunction. Three different style housings (flush, raised panel, oval) assure seamless integration with Contura switches and into most any dashboard panel. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: 3 Styles to choose from Single or double window Illumination 25 lens colors and configurations Available connector for easily installation 78 Transportation www.carlingtech.com VP-Series Contura Illuminated Indicator - Ordering Scheme B 1 1 K K VP 1 6 6 1 Series 2 3 Termination Lamp 4 Lamp 5 Housing Color 6 Lens Design 1 SERIES VP Illuminated plug H2 1 Housing only 2 H3 Lamp module only HP1-01 VP connector for oval and flush bezel only VC1-01 VP connector for raised bezel only 2 TERMINATION 1 .250 TAB 8 Lens Color 9 Lens Color 00 0 00 10 Legend 11 12 Legend Actuator Orientation Legend 8, 9 LENS (same coding for both selections) 3,4,5,6,9 Z No Lens Clear White Amber Green Red Blue Lens Style 4 9 E K RWOne piece Square/Oval 11 5 A F L SY Two piece Square* (with clear top protective lens) 27CHN U Two piece Square* (with smoke top protective lens) 1 6 B G MT Two piece Square* (with white top protective lens) *All bottom lenses are molded of opaque material. Consult factory for other lens colors. 3,4 LAMP (same coding for both selections) 4,5,6,8,9,12 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* Amber Green Red 2VDC L F R 6VDC M G S 12VDC N H T 24VDC P J V *Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 5 HOUSING COLOR flush bracket raised bracket 13 Black B6 GrayW – WhiteR 5 Red G– 7 Lens Design 10 LAMP #1 LENS OR BODY LEGEND 5 00 No legend For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com 11 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 oval bezel (Contura V) 1 2 3 4 6,7 SQUARE LENS DESIGN (same coding for both selections) 4,5,6,11,12 Z no lens 1 transparent diamond square 10 2 translucent square 7 3 laser etched 10 4 transparent oval 5 translucent oval 12 LAMP #2 LENS OR BODY LEGEND 5 00 No legend For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com Notes: 1 To order housing with lenses only, specify H2 followed by fields 5-12. (flush bezel only) 2 To order lamp module only, specify H3 followed by fields 2-3. (flush bezel only) 3 Two piece lens not available with oval bezel. 4 If only 1 lamp, specify 0 in selection 4 and Z in selections 7 & 9. 5 Lamp and lens #1 located over terminals 1A and 1B for flush & oval bezel. 6 Lamp and lens #2 located over terminals 2A and 2B for flush & oval bezel. 7 Available with 2 piece lens option only. 8 Neon lamps not recommended with blue or green lenses. 9 Green or blue lenses not recommended with neon lamps. 10 Available with one piece lens option only. 11 Oval bezel available with oval lens only. Oval lens available with oval bezel only. 12 Lamp & lens #1 located over terminals 7 & 8, & #2 located over 9 & 10 for raised bezel option. 13 Both bracket and insert will be same color. For white bracket with black insert, specify 7. For black bracket with white insert, specify 8. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 79 VP-Series Contura Illuminated Indicator - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1.910 [48.51] 1.910 [48.51] .960 [24.38] .960 [24.38] .416 [10.57] .960 [24.38] .780 [19.81] .350 [8.89] 1.440[36.58] 1.506 [38.25] .820 [20.83] .100[2.54] .900 [22.86] .40[11.4] .390 [ 9.90] 1.370 [34.79] .820 [20.82] .250 X .032 Q.C. (6.35 X 0.81) 1.015 [25.78] 2.086 [52.98] .120 [3.05] .900 [22.86] .40[11.4] PLUG SHOWN WITH VC1 CONNECTOR .820 [20.83] 1.928 [48.97] .820 [20.83] 1.440 [36.58] .250 X .032 Q.C. (6.35 X 0.81) .830 [21.08] .820 [20.83] A PACKARD 630 VC1 .920[23.37] B AMP, PACKARD 58 10 3 2 1 8 .920 [23.37] 1.450 [36.83] 1.266[32.16] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL HP1-01 ILLUMINATED PLUG CONNECTOR MARKING DETAIL FRONT VIEW VC1 CONNECTOR HOUSING ILLUMINATED PLUG MOUNTING HOLE (OVAL, FLUSH AND RAISED BEZELS) LAMP #1 (+)8,1A (-)7,1B LAMP #2 (+)10,2A (-)9,2B CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (OVAL, FLUSH AND RAISED BEZELS) MOUNTING PANEL THICKNESSES: .062[1.57] .250[6.35] .093[2.36] .375[9.52] .125[3.17] .500[12.70] .187[4.75] Notes: Oval and flush bezel styles use terminals 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B. Raised bezel style uses terminals 7, 8, 9, 10. 80 www.carlingtech.com W–Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Introduction W-Series W-Series SEALED ROCKER SWITCHES Carling Technologies set the standard for performance and aesthetics with the widely successful, often imitated, but never duplicated, V-Series rocker switches. Building further upon that platform, Carling has once again raised the bar with the fully sealed W-Series. The W-Series’ traditional appearance features complete IP68 protection, including below the panel, where the critical connection is made from the wiring harness. When used in conjunction with the integrated connector, the totally submersible W-Series provides a seal for up to ten individual wires, assuring compatibility with even the most complex circuitry. The W-Series also offers a wide variety of accoutrements, including endless illumination options featuring dual level and multicolor LEDs, progressive and hazard warning circuits, ratings up to 10A 24V, choice of paddle, rocker, locking or laser etched actuators, hundreds of standard legend choices and the electrical performance and reliability that is the hallmark of Carling Technologies products. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Fully sealed and submersible IP68 protection, including below the panel Tri-seal design Connector with twin locking tabs www.carlingtech.com Marine equipment ON/OFF Highway equipment 81 W–Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Design Features W-Series Switch DESIGN FEATURES ILLUMINATION Choice of highly reliable SMT LED or incandescent lighting with 21 dependent or independent circuit options. BODY One piece polyester 94V0 seamless body acts as an umbrella to protect critical internal components. 82 TRI-SEAL DESIGN Sealing at actuator, an insert molded neoprene base seal, along with wire lead seals, assures water tight, fully submersible protection. ROLLER PIN Proven reliable mechanism is lubricant free and allows for 100k electrical and 250k mechanical cycles, and withstands extreme temperatures from -40˚C to +85˚C. INTEGRATED CONNECTOR Accommodates Tyco/Amp .110 junior power timer contacts with twin locking tabs to provide a safe, secure, sealed connection. www.carlingtech.com W–Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - General Specifications Electrical Contact Rating Dielectric Strength Insulation Resistance Initial Contact Resistance Life Contacts Terminals Quick Voltage Overcurrent Mechanical Endurance .4VA @ 24VDC 10 amps, 3-24VDC 1500 Volts RMS 50 Megaohms 10 milliohms max. @ 4 VDC 100,000 cycles Silver tin-oxide, 88/12 Copper with silver or gold plating Connect terminations. 3-24 VDC 15A for 50 cycles 250,000 cycles minimum Physical Lighted LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life (LED is internally ballasted for voltages to 24 VDC) SealsNeoprene Base Polyester blend rated to 125C with a UL flammability rating of 94V0. Actuator Basic actuator structure molded of thermoplastic polycarbonate with a hard Nylon 66 thermoplastic surface overlay. Lens Polycarbonate rated at 100°C Function 2 & 3 Position Rocker Style Operation Maintained & Momentary Base PA 6/6 30GF (glass filled) Actuator PA 6/6 13GF Bracket PBT 10GF Connector PBT 10GF, polarized Actuator Travel (Angular Displacement) Environmental Environmental IP68, Fully sealed Corrosion/ Flowing Mixed Gas (FMG) Chemical Splash Class III 3 year accelerated exposure per ASTM B-827, B-845 Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C, 22 cycles, 300 hours Vibration 1 Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 204D Test Condition A 0.06 DA or 10G’s 10-500 Hz. Vibration 2 Resonance search 24-50 Hz 0.40 DA 50-2000 ±10 G’s peak Results Horizontal Axis 3-5 G’s max. Random 24 Hz 0.06 PSD-Gsq/Hz 60 Hz 0.50 100 Hz 0.50 200 Hz 0.025 2000 Hz 0.025 Handling/Drop One meter onto concrete floor Salt Spray Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 101D, Test Condition A, 48 Hrs. DustIP6X Thermal Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 107F, Test Condition A, -55°C to 85°C Test criteria - pre and post test contact resistance Moisture Resistance/ Humidity Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 106F, Test Criteria - pre and post test contact resistance Mounting Specifications Panel Thickness Range .032 to .125 For optimum panel fit, the following panel thicknesses are suggested: .032, .062, .093, .125 .830[21.08] 24° full throw 1.450[36.83] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL SWITCH MOUNTING HOLE *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 83 W-Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Ordering Scheme 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 8 Bracket 1 SERIES W 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1121 ON NONE OFF 1222 (ON) NONE OFF 1323 ON NONE (OFF) 1424 ON NONE ON 1525 ON NONE (ON) 1626 ONOFF ON 1727 ON OFF (ON) 1828 (ON) OFF (ON) - 49 ONON ON 3 RATING B 10A 24V D 10A 12V G 10A 6V H 10A 3V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 2 .110 TAB (QC) 84 9 Actuator 10 Lens 11 Lens 0 00 12 Legend 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 LED* superbright Red AmberGreen White 2VDC A LF4 6VDC B MG5 12VDC C NH6 24VDC D PJ8 * Consult factory for “daylight bright”, blue/green and white LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 BRACKET COLOR 1 1 Black 9 ACTUATOR 1,3 3 Black with Laser Etched A Black 10 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #1 TERMINALS 1,4 11 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #2 TERMINALS 3,6 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens Clear White Amber Green Red Blue 1 - B G M T - 7 C H N U 3 - D J P V - 9 E K R W 5 A - - - - Large Transparent Large Translucent Bar Transparent Bar Translucent Laser-Etched Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend this location/No actuator 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O OFF ON O I 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F 21 22 23 24 OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 Orientation 1 P P P Orientation 2 5 ILLUMINATION Lamp #1:above terminals 1&4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3&6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Actuator Lens Position Lamps Illumination Type Lamp Wired to Terminals O NONE A # 1 Independent 8+ 7B # 1 Down 3+ 7C # 2 Up 3+ 7D # 1 Down 3+ 7 & # 2 Down 1+ 7E # 1 Up 1+ 7 & # 2 Up 3+ 7F # 1 Independent 8+ 7 & # 2 Up 3+ 6G # 1 Independent 8+ 7 & # 2 Up 3+ 7H # 2 Independent 8+ 7Selections for Single Pole Witches Only: J # 1 Down 3+ 8 & # 2 Independent 6+ 7K # 1 Independent 8+ 7 & # 2 Independent 6+ 7Selections for Double Pole Switches Only: L # 1 Down 3+ 6M # 2 Up 3+ 6N # 1 Down 3+ 6 & # 2 Down 1+ 4P # 1 Up 1+ 4 & # 2 Up 3+ 6R # 1 Down 3+ 7 & # 2 Up 6+ 7S # 1 Down 6+ 7 & # 2 Independent 8+ 7U # 1 Independent 8+ 7 & # 2 Independent 10+ 9V # 2 Independent 10+ 9W # 1 Independent 8+ 7 & # 2 Independent 10+ 7Y # 1 & # 2 Independent in Series 8+ 7Z # 1 & # 2 Independent in Parallel 8+ 7- A 7 Z 00 Orientation 4 W 11 D 2 B C 0 1 P P AY3-200 P AY3-100 Orientation 3 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 2 00 No legend this location/no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens & one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com Notes: 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red & gray actuators; Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Locking rocker version is also available, consult factory for details. www.carlingtech.com W-Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1.000 [25.40] 1.724 [43.78] 12° 1.962 [49.83] .418 [10.62] 1.707 [43.36] 2.162 [54.91] .031 [.79] .465 [11.81] 1.664 [42.27] .110 [2.79] SWITCH SHOWN WITH CONNECTOR INSTALLED KEYING FEATURE 1.178 [29.93] .714 [18.14] 1.080 [27.43] WCH CONNECTOR (190-31214-001) 1.200 [30.48] Notes: WCH connector is intended for use with Tyco/Amp .110 Junior Power Timer, female contacts, and wire seals. For 14-16 awg wire, specify Tyco/Amp P/N 927766-3 For 16-20 awg wire, specify Tyco/Amp P/N 927770-3 Tyco/Amp cable seal P/N 828904-1 (20-18 awg wire) or P/N 828905-1 (16-14 awg wire) is required for each individual wire lead, and Tyco/Amp cable plug, P/N 828922-1, is required to seal each unused connector opening. Consult Tyco/Amp for the cable seal recommended for your specific wire gauge and thickness. www.carlingtech.com 85 L–Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Introduction L-Series L-Series SEALED ROCKER SWITCHES The L-Series rocker switch is an innovative product offering total design flexibility, while at the same time setting new standards for performance and reliability. Its versatile design features include a neatly proportioned size that fits into an industry standard mounting hole of 1.734 x .867 (44.0mm x 22.0mm), countless unique choices for ratings, circuits, colors, illuminations and laser etched legends. These single or double pole switches also feature a broad choice of actuator styles, colors, and lenses with up to twelve terminals offering an extensive range of switch and lamp circuit options, including LED or incandescent illumination. Additionally, an optional plug-in terminal connector enables pre-wiring of wire harness. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Watch Product Video Product Highlights: IP67 certified sealed front panel components Withstands temperatures from -40°C to +85°C Vibration, shock, thermoshock, moisture and salt spray resistant 86 Typical Applications: Construction machinery Agricultural equipment On-highway transportation equipment www.carlingtech.com L–Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Design Features L-Series Switch DESIGN FEATURES LED LIGHTING Utilize less current and are not affected by vibration, providing long lasting illumination. Available in 3 standard colors. LENS & LEGENDS Lens available in 2 sizes and 6 standard colors in either translucent or transparent materials. Numerous symbols and text available for imprinting or laser etching. www.carlingtech.com SEAL PROTECTION Locks out elements such as water, dust & debris. Certified to IP67 for front panel components. ACTUATOR Available in rocker or paddle styles. Several standard color options also available. ROLLER PIN Eliminates need for lubricants, increasing the temperature range of the switch from -40˚ C to +85˚C [-40˚ F to 185˚ F]. TERMINALS Available with 2 industry standard termination options: .250 or .187 tabs with up to 12 terminal options. BASE Fits into industry standard mounting hole of 1.734 x .867 in [44.0mm x 22.0mm]. 87 L–Series Sealed Rocker Switches - General Specifications Electrical Environmental Contact Rating .4VA @ 24VDC (MAX) resistive 15 amps, 125VAC 10 amps, 250VAC 20 amps, 4-14VDC 15 amps, 15-28VDC Dielectric Strength 1250 Volts RMS between pole to pole 3750 Volts RMS between live parts and accessible surfaces Insulation Resistance 50 Megaohms Initial Contact Resistance 10 milliohms max. @ 4 VDC Life 100,000 cycles maintained, 50,000 cycles momentary at rated voltage and current Contacts 90/10 silver-nickel, silver tinoxide, gold Terminals Brass or copper/silver plate 3/16” (4.76mm) & 1/4” (6.3mm) Quick Connect terminations standard. Environmental IP67 for above panel components of the actual switch, representing an index of protection as applied to electrical equipment in accordance with IEC 529, BS 5490, DIN 400 50 & NFC 20 010. Corrosion Mixed Flowing Gas MFG Class III per ASTM B-827 & B-845, Method H, with 3 years exposure. Operating Temperature -40°C to + 85°C Vibration 1 Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 204D Test Condition A 0.06 DA or 10G’s 10-500 Hz. Tested with VCH connector. Test criteria - No loss of circuit during test and pre and post test contact resistance. Vibration 2 Resonance search 24-50 Hz 0.40 DA 50-2000 ±10 G’s peak Results Horizontal Axis 3-5 G’s max. Random 24 Hz 0.06 PSD-Gsq/Hz 60 Hz 0.50 100 Hz 0.50 200 Hz 0.025 2000 Hz 0.025 No loss of circuit during test; <10µ chatter. Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 213B, Test Condition K @ 30G’s. Tested with VCH connector. Test criteria - No loss of circuit during test, pre, and post test contact resistance. Salt Spray Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 101D, Test Condition A, 48 Hrs. Thermal Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 107F, Test Condition A, -55°C to 85°C. Test criteria - pre and post test contact resistance. Moisture Resistance Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 106F, Test Criteria - pre and post test contact resistance. Mechanical Endurance 250,000 cycles minimum Physical Lighted Incandescent - rated 10,000 hours LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life (LED is internally ballasted for voltages to 24 VDC) Seals Rocker, base & bracket are sealed. Base Nylon 66 GF rated to 85°C with a flammability rating of 94V0. Actuator Basic actuator structure molded of thermoplastic polycarbonate with a hard Nylon 66 thermoplastic surface overlay. LockAcetal Lens Polycarbonate rated at 100°C Function 2 & 3 Position Rocker Style Bracket Nylon Zytel 1.970 Connector Nylon 66 rated at 85°C. Polarized. Actuator Travel (Angular Displacement) .260 [6.60] .390 [9.91] 2 position 3 positions 26° 13° from center Mounting Specifications .867 [22.02] 1.734 [44.04] 1.020 [25.91] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL MOUNTING HOLE .100 [2.54] 2.265 [57.53] 3.055 [77.60] Panel Thickness Range Acceptable Panel Thickness .030 to .156 (.76mm to 3.96mm) Recommended: .030, .062, .093, .125 and .156 .230 X .031 [5.84 X .79] T1 BAT T2 OUTPUT (LOAD) T3 GROUND PADDLE STYLE ACTUATOR *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 88 Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE 1.300 [33.02] .344 [8.74] COMPANY SERIES PACKARD PART NO. WIRE GAGE AWG MM 2 www.carlingtech.com L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches – Ordering Scheme L 11 E 3 C H N 1 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 8 Bracket 1 SERIES L 2 CIRCUIT 2 Terminal Orientation 9 Actuator 1 48 10 11 12 Lens Style Lens Style Legend & Color & Color 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 5 ILLUMINATION Lamp #1:above terminals 9 & 10 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 11 & 12 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only. ( ) - momentary SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 4. DP - double pole uses terminals 5, 6 & 8. Terminals 9, 10 & 11 for lamp circuit only. Position:1 2 SP DP 2 & 4, 6 & 8 Connected Terminals 1121 ON NONE 1222 (ON) NONE 1323 ON NONE 1424 ON NONE 1525 ON NONE 1626 ONOFF 1727 ON OFF 1828 (ON) OFF CIRCUITS WITH JUMPER TERMINALS 30* (2,4&5), (1,6&8) OFF, OFF 31 1, 2 & 5 2, 3 & 7 PROGRESSIVE CIRCUITS 51 3 & 4 2, 3 52 3 & 4 2, 3 53 (3 & 4) 2, 3 54 (3 & 4) 2, 3 55 (3 & 4) 2, 3 56 (3 & 4) 2, 3 57 3 & 4 2, 3 58* 2 & 4 2, 3 61 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 62 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 63 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 64 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 65 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 66 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 67 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 68 2 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 4, OFF 69* 2 & 4, 1, 7 & 8 2 & 4, OFF 70 (2 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, 5 & 7 71 (2&4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, 5 & 7 72 2 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 4, 5 & 7 73 (2 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, OFF 80 2 & 4, 6 & 8 2 & 4, OFF HAZARD WARNING CIRCUITS A2 6,7 & 8, 3 & 4 NONE A3 6,7 & 8, 2 & 4 NONE * Available with ratings 1, 4, & E only. 3 1 & 2, 5 & 6 OFF OFF (OFF) ON (ON) ON (ON) (ON) (1,2&8), (4,5&6) 2, 4 & 8 1&2 OFF 1&2 (OFF) (1 & 2) (OFF) (OFF) 1&2 1 & 2, 5 & 6 OFF, OFF 1 & 2, 5 & 6 OFF, OFF (1 & 2), (5 & 6) (OFF, OFF) (OFF, OFF) OFF, OFF OFF, OFF (1 & 2), (5 & 7) 1 & 2, 5 & 7 1 & 2, 5 & 7 OFF, OFF OFF, 5 & 6 OFF, 1 & 2 OFF, 1 & 2 3 RATING 2 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive 4 10A 250VAC 1/2 HP, 15A 125VAC 1/2 HP, No Listings B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 15A 12V G 20A 6V H 20A 3V 4 TERMINATION 2,3 1 .250 (6.4mm) TAB (QC) 3 .187 (4.7mm) TAB (QC) Lamps Illumination Type None # 1 Independent # 2 Independent # 1 Independent & # 2 Independent # 1 Dependent # 1 Independent & # 2 Dependent # 1 Independent & # 2 Dependent # 1 Dependent & # 2 Independent # 1 Both Independent & # 2 (in series) # 1 Dependent & # 2 Dependent # 2 Hazard # 1 Hazard Lamp Wired to Terminals 10+ 12+ 10+ 12+ 4+ 10+ 4+ 10+ 8+ 4+ 10+ 10+ 9119999999999- 4+ 1+ 6+ 6+ 991010- 1212- 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) Selection 6: above terminals 10 & 9; Selection 7: above terminals 12 & 11 No lamp 0 Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* Red Amber Green 2VDC A LF 6VDC B MG 12VDC C NH 24VDC D PJ * Consult factory for “daylight bright”, blue/green and white LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 BRACKET COLOR 1 Standard Bracket Rockerguard at Lamp 1 Rockerguard at Lamp 2 Black White Gray Red 1 2 34 A B CD E F GH 9 ACTUATOR STYLE AND COLOR 1 Black White Gray Red Laser Etched Rocker A B C D3 Paddle J N K M4 10 & 11 LENS STYLE AND COLOR Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens Clear White Amber Green Red Blue 1 - B G M T Large Transparent - 7 C H NU Large Translucent 3 - D J PV Bar Transparent - 9 E K RW Bar Translucent 5A - - -- Laser Etched background color 12 LASER ETCHED, LENS OR BODY LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator For legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 - vertical, lamp 1 on top 2 Orientation 2 - horizontal, lamp 1 on right 3 Orientation 3 - vertical, lamp 1 on bottom 4 Orientation 4 - vertical, lamp 1 on left Orientation 1 AA 46 AA 46 3AA-146 Orientation 2 Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 Circuits 30, 31, 58, 69 are not available with rating codes 4, C, D, G or H. 3 Termination 3 only available with rating codes 1, B, and E. 4 Not available with circuits 11-18, 51-57 and 69. S A B C D E F 4 G H J 1 2 Orientation 4 1 Series 3 A A 45 3AA-246 Orientation 3 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator For legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com www.carlingtech.com 89 L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Locking - Ordering Scheme L 11 D 1 S W C J 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lock 3 Rating 7 Lamp 1 SERIES L P M H 00 8 Bracket 9 Actuator 10 Lens 11 Lock 0 12 Legend 13 Legend Orientation 6 LOCK W Lock above terminals 10 & 9. 2 CIRCUIT 5 Terminal Orientation ( ) - momentary SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 4. DP - double pole uses terminals 5, 6 & 8. Terminals 9, 10 & 11 for lamp circuit only. Position:1 2 SP DP 2 & 4, 6 & 8 Connected Terminals 1121 ON NONE 1424 ON NONE 1626 ONOFF 1727 ON OFF 1828 (ON) OFF CIRCUITS WITH JUMPER TERMINALS 2 30 (2,4&5), (1,6&8) OFF, OFF 31 2 1, 2 & 5 2, 3 & 7 PROGRESSIVE CIRCUITS 51 3 & 4 2, 3 52 3 & 4 2, 3 53 (3 & 4) 2, 3 54 (3 & 4) 2, 3 55 (3 & 4) 2, 3 56 (3 & 4) 2, 3 57 3 & 4 2, 3 58 2 & 4 2, 3 61 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 62 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 63 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 64 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 65 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 66 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 67 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 68 2 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 4, OFF 69 2 & 4, 1, 7 & 8 2 & 4, OFF 70 (2 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, 5 & 7 71 (2&4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, 5 & 7 72 2 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 4, 5 & 7 73 (2 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, OFF 80 2 & 4, 6 & 8 2 & 4, OFF 3 1 & 2, 5 & 6 OFF ON ON (ON) (ON) (1,2&8), (4,5&6) 2, 4 & 8 1&2 OFF 1&2 (OFF) (1 & 2) (OFF) (OFF) 1&2 1 & 2, 5 & 6 OFF, OFF 1 & 2, 5 & 6 OFF, OFF (1 & 2), (5 & 6) (OFF, OFF) (OFF, OFF) OFF, OFF OFF, OFF (1 & 2), (5 & 7) 1 & 2, 5 & 7 1 & 2, 5 & 7 OFF, OFF OFF, 5 & 6 3 RATING 2 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive 4 10A 250VAC 1/2 HP, 15A 125VAC 1/2 HP, No Listings B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 15A 12V G 20A 6V H 20A 3V 4 TERMINATION 4 1 .250 (6.4mm) TAB (QC) 3 .187 (4.7mm) TAB (QC) 7 LAMP Above terminals 12 & 11 No lamp 0 Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V LED* Red Amber Green 2VDC A LF 6VDC B MG 12VDC C NH 24VDC D PJ 7 18V 8 24V * Consult factory for “daylight bright”, blue/green and white LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 BRACKET COLOR 1 J Black 9 ACTUATOR STYLE AND COLOR 1 Black Red Locking Rocker PR 10 & 11 LENS STYLE AND COLOR Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens Clear White Amber Green Red Blue 1 - B G M T Large Transparent - 7 C H NU Large Translucent 3 - D J PV Bar Transparent - 9 E K RW Bar Translucent 11 LOCK FUNCTION AND COLOR Locking Position Up Down Up & Down Center 3 AH R 1 BJ S 2 CK T 3 DL V 4 EM W 5 Lock Color Match Actuator Black White Red Safety Orange 12 LASER ETCHED, LENS OR BODY LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator For legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 - vertical, lamp 1 on top 2 Orientation 2 - horizontal, lamp 1 on right 3 Orientation 3 - vertical, lamp 1 on bottom 4 Orientation 4 - vertical, lamp 1 on left PZAY2-2 LOCK ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL ORIENTATION 1 LOCK P LOCK P P LOCK ORIENTATION 2 2 Circuit ORIENTATION 4 1 Series P Lamp #1:above terminals 9 & 10 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 11 & 12 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only. S B Lamps None # 2 P P 5 ILLUMINATION Illumination Type Lamp Wired to Terminals Independent 12+ LOCK LOCK PZAY2-1 ORIENTATION 3 11- Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 Additional lamp circuits available. Consult factory. 3 Available only with 3 position circuits. 4 Termination 3 only available with ratings 1, B and E. 5 Circuits 30, 31, 58 and 69, are not available with rating codes 4, C, D, G or H. 90 www.carlingtech.com L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] L-SERIES L-SERIES SHOWN WITH LASER ETCHED ACTUATOR SHOWN WITH ROCKER GUARD 1.970 [50.04] 1.020 [25.91] .435 [10.16] .400 [10.16] 1.450 [36.83] .855 [21.72] L-SERIES L-SERIES SHOWN WITH LARGE LENS AND PADDLE ACTUATOR SHOWN WITH BAR LENS, LOCK AND CONNECTOR 1.970 [50.04] 1.020 [25.91] .453 [11.51] .400 [10.16] Connector LC1-01 LC2-01 LC3-01 12 4 3 2 1 10 12 4 3 2 1 10 Hole Plug L-SERIES CONNECTOR L-SERIES HOLE PLUG BLACK .250 TAB CONNECTOR (PACKARD 630 SERIES) BLACK .187 TAB CONNECTOR (PACKARD 480 SERIES) 1.970 [50.04] BLACK .250 TAB CONNECTOR (AMP ONLY) 2.380 [60.45] LH1 REMOVABLE HOLE PLUG WITH NON-SERRATED WINGS LH2 HOLE PLUG WITH SERRATED WINGS 1.020 [25.91] .500 [12.70] 1.325 [33.66] .920 [23.37] 1.710 [43.43] www.carlingtech.com .790 [20.07] .300 [7.62] .855 [21.72] 91 L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] +.008 -.000 +.008 -.000 .984 [25.00] 2.020 [51.31] R .093 MAX TYP R .093 MAX TYP MOUNTING PANEL TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL +.008 -.000 1.900 [48.26] FOR ADDITIONAL UNITS, ADD 1.03 [26.2] PER UNIT. FOR MORE THAN 2 L-SERIES SWITCHES, ADD MIDDLE SECTION. AVAILABLE IN PANEL THICKNESSES LISTED BELOW. CONSULT FACTORY +.008 -.000 1.900 [48.26] DIMENSIONS: LME 2.02 [51.3mm] PLUS NUMBER OF CENTER BEZELS (LMM) X 1.034 [26.26mm] LMS MOUNTING PANEL HOLE MOUNTING PANEL THICKNESS .062 [1.57] .093 [2.36] .125 [3.17] .156 [3.96] MOUNTING PANEL OPENING (2) UNITS 2.300 [58.42] 2.300 [58.42] 1.187 [30.15] 1.030 [26.16] LME MOUNTING PANEL END 1.990 [50.55] 2.300 [58.42] 1.340 [34.04] LMM MOUNTING PANEL MIDDLE LMS MOUNTING PANEL 1.700 [43.18] 1.030 [26.16] 1.030 [26.16] .670 [17.02] 2.300 [58.42] 2.300 [58.42] 3.400 [86.36] 4.430 [112.52] LM3 MOUNTING PANEL PANEL OPENING SIZE: 1.90 X 3.06 [48.3mm X 77.7mm] LM4 MOUNTING PANEL PANEL OPENING SIZE: 1.90 X 4.09 [48.3mm X 103.9mm] 1.030 [26.16] .670 [17.02] 2.300 [58.42] 6.490 [164.85] LM6 MOUNTING PANEL PANEL OPENING SIZE: 1.90 X 6.15 [48.3mm X 156.2mm] 92 www.carlingtech.com L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagrams: CIRCUIT CODE CIRCUIT CODE SCHEMATIC CIRCUIT CODE SCHEMATIC 5 4 4 11 22 6 2 4 2 23 1 2 6 2 4 2 1 14 2 6 4 54 2 2 1 4 15 6 4 8 5 26 2 4 1 16 2 6 4 57 2 6 2 4 1 18 4 2 6 2 21 1 3 31 2 www.carlingtech.com 6 4 3 4 58 2 8 1 8 5 30 4 4 3 8 5 28 1 4 3 8 5 2 1 17 3 56 2 4 4 1 2 6 4 27 1 2 55 2 1 4 3 8 5 25 1 3 53 2 4 4 1 8 5 24 1 4 3 52 2 13 3 5 4 4 1 51 2 12 SCHEMATIC 4 5 7 2 8 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8 61 2 93 L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagrams: CIRCUIT CODE CIRCUIT CODE SCHEMATIC 3 SCHEMATIC 7 1 62 4 5 4 5 8 71 2 4 1 3 6 8 5 7 2 1 7 63 8 72 2 4 6 7 2 8 3 4 7 64 8 73 2 4 1 3 6 7 2 8 5 5 4 7 65 8 80 2 4 6 6 2 8 3 4 7 5 1 8 81 66 2 4 6 6 2 8 3 1 7 67 5 4 8 82 2 4 6 6 3 8 8 4 1 68 2 3 4 7 8 A2 INTERNAL CONNECTION 7 2 6 8 4 1 69 1 4 7 8 A3 INTERNAL CONNECTION 7 2 1 4 2 5 6 8 70 2 94 7 www.carlingtech.com L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Lamp Circuit Diagrams Lamp Circuit Diagrams: ILLUMIN. CODE ILLUMIN. CODE SCHEMATIC -9 A SCHEMATIC -9 J 1 +1 +4 1 2 +10 -11 B 2 -12 1 INTERNAL CONNECTION +10 +12 -9 C -12 1 2 +10 -9 D 2 2 INTERNAL CONNECTION 1 +10 +12 +4 (–)9 K 1 1 (+)10 -9 E +4 2 1 LEGEND SYMBOL +10 -9 DEFINITION TERMINAL LOCATION +8 LAMP LOCATION F 1 MAINTAINED CIRCUIT 2 MOMENTARY CIRCUIT INTERNAL CONNECTION (JUMPER TERMINAL) +10 -9 +4 2 POSITION CONNECTION G 1 2 P3 P1 2 POSITION +10 -9 P3 H 1 2 P2 P1 3 POSITION +10 www.carlingtech.com 95 LP-Series Illuminated Indicators - Introduction LP-Series LP-Series ILLUMINATED INDICATORS The LP-Series Illuminated Indicators are the perfect complement to the aesthetics, reliability and performance of our L-Series rocker switches. As a critical safety feature, the illumination alerts the operator of essential system functions or malfunctions, such as: Oil Pressure, High Temperature, Transmission or other fluid levels, Parking Brake or General System confirmations. The L-Series styling assures seamless integration into most any dashboard panel. Product Highlights: Vibration, Shock, and Thermoshock Resistant 12 or 24 Volts Laser Etched or Lens Illumination IP67 Sealing 96 Typical Applications: On/Off-Highway Equipment Agricultural Equipment Construction Equipment www.carlingtech.com LP-Series Illuminated Indicators - General Specifications Electrical Terminals Brass or copper/silver plate 3/16” (4.76mm) & 1/4” (6.3mm) Quick Connect terminations standard. Lighted Incandescent - rated 10,000 hours LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life (LED is internally ballasted for voltages to 24VDC) Physical Seals Base Insert Connector Markings Bracket Insert, base & bracket are sealed. Nylon 66 GF rated to 85°C with a flammability rating of 94VO. Polycarbonate rated at 100°C. Nylon 66 rated at 85°C. Polarized Over 1000 pad printed or laser etched legends available Nylon 66 GF rated to 85°C Mounting Specifications .867 [22.02] 1.734 [44.04] 1.020 [25.91] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL MOUNTING HOLE 3.055 [77.60] Panel Thickness Range Acceptable Panel Thickness .030 to .156 (.76mm to 3.96mm) Recommended: .030, .062, .093, .125 and .156 PADDLE STYLE ACTUATOR Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE COMPANY SERIES PACKARD PART NO. PACKARD METRI-PACK 630 SERIES TIN PLATED BRASS 12084590 12052224 12015870 12015869 12020035 12052222 WIRE GAGE AWG MM 2 Environmental Environmental IP67, representing an index of protection as applied to electrical equipment in accordance with IEC 529, BS 5490, DIN 400 50 & NFC 20 010. Corrosion Resistance Mixed Flowing Gas MFG Class III per ASTM B-827 & B-845, Method H, with 3 years exposure. Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C Vibration 1 Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 204D Test Condition A 0.06 DA or 10G’s 10- 500 Hz. Tested with VCH connector. Test criteria - No loss of circuit during test and pre and post test contact resistance. Vibration 2 Resonance search 24-50 Hz 0.40 DA 50-2000 ±10 G’s peak Results Horizontal Axis 3-5 G’s max. Random 24 Hz 0.06 PSD-Gsq/Hz 60 Hz 0.50 100 Hz 0.50 200 Hz 0.025 2000 Hz 0.025 No loss of circuit during test; <10µ chatter. Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 213B, Test Condition K @ 30G’s. Tested with VCH connector. Test criteria - No loss of circuit during test, pre, and post test contact resistance. Salt Spray Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 101D, Test Condition A, 48 Hrs. Thermal Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 107F, Test Condition A, -55°C to 85°C. Test criteria - pre and post test contact resistance. Moisture Resistance Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 106F, Test Criteria - pre and post test contact resistance. 3.0 12 12 3.0 2.0-1.0 16-14 1.0-.80 20-18 22-18 (2 REQ'D) .80.-.50 (2 REQ'D) .50-.35 20-22 *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 97 LP-Series Illuminated Indicators - Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications LP 1 H R R 5 1 Series 2 3 Termination Illumination 4 Lamp 5 Lamp 6 Bracket Color 2 TERMINATION 3 .250 (8.35) x .032 (0.51) Quick Connect .187 (4.75) x .032 (0.51) Quick Connect 3 ILLUMINATION LAMPS ILLUMINATION A 1 – B 1 – 2 – C 1 – 2 – E 1 & 2 Parallel H 1 & 2 Series LAMP WIRED TO TERMINALS 10 (+) 8 (–) 10 (+) 8 (–) 12 (+) 11 (–) 10 (+) 8 (–) 12 (+) 8 (–) 10 (+) 8 (–) 10 (+) 8 (–) LAMP 1 LOCATED ABOVE TERMINALS 9 & 10 END OF BRACKET. LAMP 2 LOCATED ABOVE TERMINALS 11 & 12 END OF BRACKET. POSITIVE (+) AND NEGATIVE (–) SYMBOLS APPLY TO LED LAMPS ONLY. 4,5 LAMP (same coding for both selections) 2 Selection 4: specifies lamp 1 located above terminals 10 (+) & 9 (-). Selection 5: specifies lamp 2 located above terminals 12 (+) & 11 (-). No lamp0 (position 5 only) Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V LED Amber Green 2VDC L F 6VDC M G 12VDC N H 24VDC P J 6 12V Red R S T V 8 Style 1 DU 10 Legend 1 9 Style 11 Legend Orientation 7 INSERT COLOR 1, 2 9 Painted Black - Laser Etch A Clear (Transparent) B White (Translucent) C Red (Translucent) D Amber (Translucent) E Green (Translucent) F Blue (Translucent) 1 SERIES LP L-Series Illumination Plug 1 3 9 A A Y2 7 Insert Color 7 18V 8 24V 12 Legend 2 8, 9 STYLE (same coding for both selections) Z Not Painted (used with Insert Colors A-F) 5 Clear Laser Etch Background Color (used with Insert Color 9) A White Laser Etch Background Color (used with Insert Color 9) 10 LEGEND OVER LAMP 1 00 No legend __ Laser Etched or Body Legends For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com 11 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 4F MC MA MA MC 4F100 MA3MC MA1MC 12 LEGEND OVER LAMP 2 00 No legend __ Laser Etched or Body Legends For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com 6 BRACKET COLOR 5 Black Notes: 1 To order separately, specify LPC and selection 7 code. Ex LPC-9 2 For LEDs, insert color must be clear, white or match color of LED. 3 For connector, specify part number LC2-01 (.187 tabs), LC3-01 (.250 tabs). 1.970[50.04] 1.020[25.91] POS 3 POS 2 POS 1 1.450[36.83] .280[7.11] 98 .250 X .032 [6.35] [.81] .855[21.72] www.carlingtech.com LD-Series Electronic Dimmer Control - Introduction LD-Series LD-Series ELECTRONIC DIMMER CONTROLS The LD-Series represents a dynamic breakthrough in dashboard technology, with its programmable circuitry, superior design, and unparalleled performance that affords seamless integration into most any dash panel. A variety of options, along with superior performance, functionality, and aesthetics assure compliance with the most stringent customer requirements. Key features include: robust design package with all components encased in switch housing, eliminating wire chafing, providing cost-savings as well; minimized electrical connections; IP67 sealing which prevents PCB degradation and eliminates short circuit potential. Superior heat dissipation is achieved with a heat sink mass which is over 50% larger than competitive products. Fully programmable circuitry lets the designer decide illumination levels and detent positions. EMC eliminates electrical “noise” and provides interference-free radio signals. Ease of assembly is accommodated with polarized integral connectors and an industry standard mounting hole. Product Highlights: 3 Choices for incremental dimming rates 12 or 24 Volts Laser Etched or Lens Illumination IP67 Sealing Typical Applications: On/Off-Highway Equipment Agricultural Equipment Construction Equipment www.carlingtech.com 99 LD-Series Electronic Dimmer Control - General Specifications Electrical Contact Rating Dielectric Strength .4VA @ 24VDC (MAX) resistive 15 amps, 125VAC 10 amps, 250VAC 20 amps, 4-14VDC 15 amps, 15-28VDC 1250 Volts RMS between pole to pole 3750 Volts RMS between live parts and accessible surfaces Insulation Resistance 50 Megaohms Initial Contact Resistance 10 milliohms max. @ 4VDC Life 100,000 cycles maintained, 50,000 cycles momentary at rated voltage and current Contacts 90/10 silver-nickel, silver tin-oxide, gold Terminals Brass or copper/silver plate .230 (5.84 mm) Quick Connect terminations standard. Mechanical Endurance .250,000 cycles minimum Physical Lighted Incandescent - rated 10,000 hours LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life (LED is internally ballasted for voltages to 24 VDC) Seals Rocker, base & bracket are sealed Base Nylon 66 GF rated to 85°C with a flammability rating of 94V0 Rocker Nylon 66 Reinforced, rated to 105°C (modular lens). Locking rocker, standard rocker & paddle. Laser etching with a polycarbonate actuator LockAcetal Lens Polycarbonate rated at 100°C Bracket Nylon Zytel 1.970 Connector Nylon 66 rated at 85°C. Polarized .260 [6.60] Actuator Travel (Angular Displacement) .390 [9.91] 1.020 [25.91] 2 position 3 positions Mounting Specifications .867 [22.02] 1.734 [44.04] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL MOUNTING HOLE 2.265 [57.53] 3.055 [77.60] Panel Thickness Range Acceptable Panel Thickness .030 to .156 (.76mm to 3.96mm) Recommended: .030, .062, .093, .125 and .156 .230 X .031 [5.84 X .79] T1 BAT T2 OUTPUT (LOAD) T3 GROUND PADDLE STYLE ACTUATOR Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 1.300 [33.02] .344 [8.74] 1.570 [39.88] Environmental IP67 for above panel components of the actual switch, representing an index of protection as applied to electrical equipment in accordance with IEC 529, BS 5490, DIN 400 50 & NFC 20 010. Corrosion Mixed Flowing Gas MFG Class III per ASTM B-827 & B-845, Method H, with 3 years exposure Operating Temperature -40°C to + 85°C Vibration 1 Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 204D Test Condition A 0.06 DA or 10G’s 10- 500 Hz. Tested with VCH connector. Test criteria - No loss of circuit during test and pre and post test contact resistance Vibration 2 24-50 Hz 0.40 DA 50-2000 ±10 G’s peak Results Horizontal Axis 3-5 G’s max. Random 24 Hz 0.06 PSD-Gsq/Hz 60 Hz 0.50 100 Hz 0.50 200 Hz 0.025 2000 Hz 0.025 No loss of circuit during test; <10µ chatter. Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 213B, Test Condition K @ 30G’s. Tested with VCH connector. Test criteria - No loss of circuit during test, pre, and post test contact resistance Salt Spray Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 101D, Test Condition A, 48 Hrs. Thermal Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 107F, Test Condition A, -55°C to 85°C. Test criteria - pre and post test contact resistance Moisture Resistance Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 106F, Test Criteria - pre and post test contact resistance 26° 13° from center .100 [2.54] 100 Environmental WIRE GAGE COMPANY SERIES PACKARD PART NO. AWG MM 2 PACKARD METRI-PACK 12084590 12052224 12015870 12 12 16-14 3.0 3.0 2.0-1.0 www.carlingtech.com LD-Series Electronic Dimmer Control - Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications 2 Rating 4 5 6 7 Termination Illumination Illumination Bracket Color 3 Dimming Rate 8 Actuator Style/ Color 9 Lens Color 2 RATING 1 4A, 12 volts 2 10A, 12 volts A C 2A, 24 volts 5A, 24 volts 3 DIMMING RATE 1 30 - 100% 8 positions 5 10 - 100% 10 positions A 0 - 100% 11 positions 4 TERMINATION 1 .230 TABS (5.84 mm) 11 Legend 1 10 Lens Color 9 & 10 LENS COLOR Z No Lens Clear White Amber 1 - B - 7 C 3 - D - 9 E 5A - 1 SERIES LD Electronic Dimmer Control 12 Legend Orientation 13 Legend 2 Green Red Blue Lens Style G MT Large Transparent H NU Large Translucent J PV Bar Transparent K RW Bar Translucent - - - Laser Etch 11 LEGEND #1 00 No legend FC Dim FE For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com Bright ORIENTATION 1 12 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend 1 vertical (lamp 1 on top) 2 horizontal (lamp 1 on right) 3 vertical (lamp 1 on bottom) 5 & 6 ILLUMINATION No lamp S Red AmberGreen 12V LEDC N H 24V LEDD P J 1 FC LAMP 1 LAMP 2 LAMP 2 ORIENTATION 4 1 Series 3 A A FE LAMP 1 LAMP 2 LAMP 1 ORIENTATION 2 LD 3 5 1 C C 1 LAMP 2 7 BRACKET COLOR 1 1 Black LAMP 1 2 White 3 Gray 8 ACTUATOR STYLE / COLOR 1 Laser Etched Black White Gray Red Rocker 3 ABCD Paddle4 J K M N 45-4ZQ 45-3ZQ ORIENTATION 3 13 LEGEND #2 00 No legend FC Dim FE For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com Bright Notes: 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. .867 [22.02] 1.970 1.734 [44.04] .260 [6.60] .390 [9.91] 1.020 [25.91] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL MOUNTING HOLE .100 [2.54] 2.265 [57.53] 3.055 [77.60] .230 X .031 [5.84 X .79] T1 BAT T2 OUTPUT (LOAD) T3 GROUND PADDLE STYLE ACTUATOR Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE 1.300 [33.02] .344 [8.74] 1.570 [39.88] 1.340 [34.04] www.carlingtech.com Panel Thickness Range Acceptable Panel Thickness .030 to .156 (.76mm to 3.96mm) Recommended: .030, .062, .093, .125 and .156 1.060 [26.92] COMPANY SERIES PACKARD PART NO. PACKARD METRI-PACK 630 SERIES TIN PLATED BRASS 12084590 12052224 12015870 12015869 12020035 12052222 WIRE GAGE AWG MM 2 3.0 12 12 3.0 2.0-1.0 16-14 1.0-.80 20-18 22-18 (2 REQ'D) .80.-.50 (2 REQ'D) .50-.35 20-22 101 LMR-Series Mirror Rotate Control - Introduction LMR-Series LMR-Series MIRROR ROTATE CONTROLS As an extension of the L-Series family of control products, the LMR-Series provides the means to control one or two mirrors and up to four separate motors from one easy to operate joy stick control. When used in conjunction with our dimmer control and wiper/washer control, Carling Technologies provides a solution to most any dashboard control need within the Transportation market. Product Highlights: Two or four axis Controls up to four separate motors Industry standard 44 x 22mm mounting hole Includes Delphi-Packard 8 pin connector 102 Typical Applications: On/Off-Highway Equipment Agricultural Equipment Construction Equipment www.carlingtech.com LMR-Series Mirror Rotate Control - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Actuator Termination Electrical Mechanism 4 axis joy stick style 1 9” wire leads with Delphi-Packard connector #12047886 1A 14V; .5A 28V 3 Sliding contacts in conjunction with a circuit board Sealing internal boot and potted wire leads protect critical components from dust and moisture LMR 1 Base Part Number 01 1 2 Color 3 Legend 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / RATING / FUNCTION / TERMINATION LMR 2 position (left, right), 4 axis (N,S,E,W) with wire leads 2 ACTUATOR /BRACKET COLOR 01 Black 3 LEGEND 2 Z no legend 1 2 arrows symbol (left, right) 2 4 arrows symbol (front, back and left, right) Notes: 1 Compatible with Delphi-Packard #12045688. 2 All legends are imprinted in white. All product supplied with Mirror L & R legend on top of bracket and detent and directional legend on actuator. 3 Delphi-Packard is a registered trademark of Delphi-Packard Electrical Systems, Warren, Ohio. 1.965 [49.91] .867 [22.02] MIRROR R TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL 1.734 [44.04] L 1.021 [25.94] WIRE 40 81A 82A 88A 88B 82B 81B 150 1.480 [37.59] PLUG MOUNTING HOLE .090 [2.29] L.H. MIRROR 88B M UP DOWN 89 COLOR ORANGE WHITE LT. BLUE YELLOW YEL-BLK ST. LT. BL-BLK ST. WHT-NLK ST. BLACK CAV I.D. A B C D E F G H R.H. MIRROR 89 88B M M M 89 RIGHT 81A 89 RIGHT 81B UP LEFT DOWN LEFT 1.280 [35.51] CONN P/N 12045688 9.060 [230.12] CONN P/N 12047886 88A 82A 81A LH 88B 82B 81B 40 150 RH 89 89 V/D L/R BATTERY SCHEMATIC GROUND *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 103 LW-Series Wiper/Washer Control - Introduction LW-Series LW-Series WIPER/WASHER CONTROLS The LW-Series Electronic Wiper Washer Control combines two switches into one self-contained unit allowing effortless control of both wash and wipe functions from a singular location. A variety of features and options including, Continuous low and high speed wiper positions, Six intermittent delay intervals ranging from 3-18 seconds, Push-to-wash button and an LED Night-light indicator combine to provide the flexibility to meet most any Cab design. The LW series is available for 14 or 28 volt operation and can be adapted to single or dual relay systems. Product Highlights: Controls both wash and wipe functions of vehicles 14 or 28 Volts Illuminated or Non-illuminated options Laser etched legends available 104 Typical Applications: On/Off-Highway Equipment Agricultural Equipment Construction Equipment www.carlingtech.com LW-Series Wiper/Washer Control - General Specifications Electrical Contact Rating Terminals Protection Mechanical Mechanical Vibration Endurance 1 relay 8 amps, 14VDC 4 amps, 28VDC 2 relays 1 amps, 14VDC 1 amps, 28VDC .187 (7.4mm) Quick Connect terminations standard. Reverse polarity protection Over voltage protection Cold cranking protection according to SAE J1455, Sections. 4.11.1.1.1 and 4.11.1.2.1 Transient voltage protection which includes load dump and inductive switching according to SAE J1455, sec. 4.11.2.2 Electrostatic discharge protection according to SAE J1455 Sec. 4.11.2.2.5.1 (Discharge a 150 pf capacitor that has been charged to a potential of 15kV through 150 Ohm resistor.) Meets all other EMI/EMC requirements for class C trucks. Physical Characteristics Illumination LED, rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life CoverAcetate Washer Actuator Silicone Toggle Actuator Nylon 6/6 glass filled Bracket Nylon 6/6 Connector Nylon 6/6 rated 85°C polarized Washer Function Momentary Toggle Function Maintained Intermittent OperationMomentary Weight 44 grams Environmental Operating Temperature -25°C to +85°C Temperature Cycle According to SAE J1455, Sec. 4.1.3.1 (See Figure below) T 85C amb -40C 4 16 24 hour Sinusoidal Vibration: 10-55-10 Hz, 0.06” DA, one minute-cycle, three hours/axis Random Vibration: Three hours/axis, three mutually perpendicular axes with a test level 4G’s. Frequency Amplitude 5Hz 0.16 G2/Hz 100Hz 0.16 G2/Hz 500Hz -3dB/octave roll-off Tests were conducted according to SAE J1455, Sec 5.7 and Sec. 4.9.4. Shock: MIL-STD-202G Method 213B, Test Condition K, 30G’s, 11 ms. According to SAE J2349, March 97 for windshield washer switch for Trucks, Buses and Multipurpose Vehicles (20,000 cycle minimum). Thermal Shock According to SAE J1455, Sec. 4.1.3.2 (See Figure below) T 8 5 °C - 4 0 °C 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 hour Humidity According to SAE J1455, Sec. 4.2.3 (30 cycles for 8 hrs. with maximum temperature of 85°C and 95% relative humidity. Dust Bombardment According to SAE J1455, Sec. 4.7.3 (with dust concentration of 0.88gm/m for 24 hours.) Salt Spray MIL-STD-202G, Method 101D for 96 hours. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 105 LW-Series Wiper/Washer Control - Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications LW 1 A 1 1 Z 1 Series 4 3 Intermittent Wiper/ Washer Timing Timing 2 Rating 5 Lamp 1 6 Lamp 2 4 5 6 7 Bracket Color 8 Rocker/ Paddle Color 10 11 Legend Legend 2 Orientation 9 Legend 1 8 ROCKER / PADDLE COLOR 1 Black 1 SERIES LW Wiper/Washer Control with six intermittent positions: low. high, wash/wipe 2 RATING 1 1 8A, 14VDC (1 relay) 2 4A, 28VDC (1 relay) 3 1A, 14VDC (1 relay) 1 1 AG 1 00 9 LEGEND #1 00 No legend For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com 1A, 14VDC (1 relay) 1A, 14VDC (2 relay) 1A, 28VDC (2 relay) 10 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend 1 Vertical (lamp 1 on top) 2 Horizontal (lamp 1 on right) 3 INTERMITTENT TIMING A 2-15 seconds 4 WIPER/WASHER TIMING 1 3 seconds 5 LAMP #1 (ABOVE WASH) Z No Lamp 1 Green LED 2 3 Red LED Amber LED 6 LAMP #2 (ABOVE WIPE) Z No Lamp 1 Green LED 2 3 Red LED Amber LED 11 LEGEND #2 00 No legend For legend options, visit us at carlingtech.com Notes: 1 Relay coil current is 1A max. Relay must have an arc suppression in parallel with the coil. Ref P/N LC2-01 for black wiper/washer connector housing. 7 BRACKET COLOR 1 Black 1.975 ±.010 [50.18 ±0.25] 0.060R MAX. 4 PLACES [1.52] 1.013 ±.010 [25.74' 0.25] 0.278 [7.06] LOW INTERMITTENT OFF 1.739 ±.008 HIGH [44.17 ±0.20] TEST CUT OPENING IN ACTUAL MATERIAL 1.082 [27.49] PRESS TO WASH .866 - .881 [22.00-22.38] SWITCH MOUNTING HOLE 3.492 [88.70] 2.522 [64.06] 1.724 [43.79] 1.700 [43.18] 0.855 [21.72] Principles of operation: From the OFF position, moving the toggle one step up puts the function into the intermittent slower mode (18 sec.). Moving the toggle another step up reduces the delay time by 3 sec for each of the next six steps. The seventh step up puts the motor into a continuous low-speed mode and the last step up puts the motor into the high-speed mode. Reversing the previous steps puts the motor finally into the stop/parking mode. During the OFF position, intermittent and low-speed modes, pressing the wash button activates the wash function. Wipe function starts after a two second delay from the onset of the washing and continues for three continuous wipes after the wash button is released. For convenience, the wash function is not active during the high-speed mode. The Wiper Control is designed to interface with single or dual relay systems for intermittent delay and the park function. The high speed is driven directly via a power transistor internal to the module. The coil of the relay is pulled down to ground during the intermittent, low-speed and high-speed modes respectively. (Contact Carling Technologies for wiring diagrams) 106 www.carlingtech.com N-Series Addressable Rocker Switches - Introduction N-Series N-Series ADDRESSABLE ROCKER SWITCHES The N-Series Addressable Switch combines the look and feel of a traditional electro-mechanical control coupled with a built in PCB and provides a flexible, cost effective alternative to a CAN/LIN based switch. The N-Series produces up to 144 individual switch IDs by using a resistive ladder circuit. Different switch IDs are achieved by changing the resistor values tied to individual loads, which can then be assigned to the specific functions that the switch is controlling. Each switch is connected to an ECU and the application software is written to recognize the switch IDs to determine which load is being controlled as well as the selected actuator position. As a result, the wiring harnesses are more simplified and specific loads can now be rearranged without the need for a costly and time consuming harness redesign, giving designers the ultimate in design flexibility. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS Product Highlights: Cost effective alternative to CAN/LIN based switch Up to 144 individual switch IDs Simplified wiring harnesses Readdressable loads without harness redesign Available with paddle or rocker actuator www.carlingtech.com STP Typical Applications: On-Highway Transportation Equipment Agricultural Equipment Construction Equipment Marine 107 1.970 [8.74] N-Series Addressable Rocker Switches - General Specifications Electrical Environmental Contact Rating .4VA @ 28VDC (MAX) Dielectric Strength 1250 Volts RMS between pole to pole 3750 Volts RMS between live parts and accessible surfaces Insulation Resistance 50 Megaohms Contact Bounce 20 milliseconds max. Contacts gold plated Terminals Brass or copper/silver plate 3/16” (4.76mm) Quick Connect terminations standard. Mechanical Endurance 250,000 cycles minimum Physical Lighted Incandescent - rated 10,000 hours LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life (LED is internally ballasted for voltages to 24VDC) Seals Rocker, base & bracket are sealed. Base Nylon 66 GF rated to 85°C with a flammability rating of 94V0. Rocker and Paddle Nylon 66 Reinforced, rated to 105°C Laser Etched Rocker Polycarbonate rated at 100°C. Lens Polycarbonate rated at 100°C. Front snap-in. Connector Nylon 66 rated at 85°C. Polarized. Bracket Nylon Zytel Environmental Operating Temperature Vibration Salt Spray Humidity Mounting Specifications .867 [22.02] Actuator Travel (Angular Displacement) 2 position .260 [6.60] 3 position 26° 13° from center IP67 for above the panel components of the actual switch, representing an index of protection as applied to electrical equipment in accordance with IEC 529, BS 5490, DIN 400 50 & NFC 20 010. -40°C to +85°C Per SAE J1399 “electronic Tachometer Specification” for Class II truck and bus applications. Test Criteria: No change in resistance and no evidence of physical damage. Exposure to 95% water, 5% NCI fog solution at 95 degrees F according to ASTM B 117-90 “Standard Method of Salt Spray (fog) Testing”. Test Criteria: No visual evidence of corrosion or external physical damage. Samples were exposed to selected temperature profile, while maintaining 90% +- 5% relative humidity for 30 cycles. Test Criteria: No evidence of external physical deterioration. 1.734 [44.04] 1.020 [25.91] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL MOUNTING HOLE 2.265 [57.53] 3.055 [77.60] Panel Thickness Range Acceptable Panel Thickness .030 to .156 (.76mm to 3.96mm) Recommended: .030, .062, .093, .125 and .156 .250 X .031 [6.35 X .79] T3 GROUND PADDLE STYLE ACTUATOR Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 108 WIRE GAGE COMPANY SERIES PACKARD PART NO. AWG MM 2 PACKARD 12084590 12052224 12 12 3.0 3.0 www.carlingtech.com N-Series Addressable Rocker Switches - Ordering Scheme N 4 1 2 1 A N H 1 1 Series 2 Actuator 3 R1 Resistive ID 4 R2 Resistive ID 5 6 7 Resistor Illumination Lamp Constants 8 Lamp 1 EK 1 1 2 46 10 Actuator 9 Bracket 11 Lens Style & Color Lamp 1 12 13 Lens Style Legend & Color Lamp 2 14 15 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 1 SERIES N 7,8 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) Selection 7: above terminals 10 & 9; Selection 8: above terminals 12 & 11 No lamp 0 2 CIRCUIT 2 Terminal Orientation LED* Red Amber Green 12VDC C NH * Consult factory for “daylight bright”, blue/green and white LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. Position: 1 ( ) - momentary 2 3 STANDARD 2 & 4 Connected Terminals 1 & 2 4 On NONE ON 5 (On) NONE ON 6 OnONON 7 (On) ON On 8 (On) ON (On) 3 R1 RESISTIVE IDENTIFICATION 1 1020 21300 31620 42000 52430 62940 73570 8 4320 A 5230 B 6340 C 7870 D 10000 4 R2 RESISTIVE IDENTIFICATION 1 1020 21300 31620 42000 52430 62940 73570 8 4320 A 5230 B 6340 C 7870 D 10000 www.carlingtech.com White 7 B F 10 ACTUATOR STYLE AND COLOR 1 Black White Gray Rocker A B C Paddle J N K Gray 8 C G Red D M Red 9 D H Laser Etched 1 11 & 12 LENS STYLE AND COLOR Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. 0 - No ActuatorZ - No Lens Clear White Amber Green 1 - B G - 7 C H 3 - D J - 9 E K 5 A - - Red M N P R - Blue T Large Transparent U Large Translucent V Bar Transparent W Bar Translucent - Laser Etch background color 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 00 No legend this location / no actuator For legend options & codes, see pages 54-65 of this catalog. 14 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 - vertical, lamp 1 on top 2 Orientation 2 - horizontal, lamp 1 on right 3 Orientation 3 - vertical, lamp 1 on bottom 4 Orientation 4 - vertical, lamp 1 on left AA 46 6 ILLUMINATION Lamp #1:above terminals 9 & 10 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 11 & 12 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only. Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals SNone A #1 Standard 10+ 12 #2 Standard 11+ 9B #1&2 Special Parallel 11+ 9C #1&2 Special Parallel 10+ 91 #1 Independent 10+ 92 #2 Independent 12+ 113 #1 Independent 10+ 9 #2 Independent 12+ 94 #1 Independent 10+ 9 #2 Independent 12+ 11- Black 6 L E Orientation 1 AA 46 3AA-146 Orientation 2 5 RESISTOR CONSTANTS (INDICATES SWITCH STATE) R3 R4R5 1 1300 10000 5320 2 825 66503830 9 BRACKET COLOR 1 Standard Bracket Rockerguard at Lamp 1 Rockerguard at Lamp 2 Orientation 4 3AA-246 Orientation 3 15 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator For legend options & codes, see pages 54-65 of this catalog. Notes: 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 Switch supplied with .187 tab terminals. 109 N-Series Addressable Rocker Switches - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] N-SERIES N-SERIES SHOWN WITH LASER ETCHED ACTUATOR SHOWN WITH ROCKER GUARD 1.970 [50.04] 1.020 [25.91] .435 [10.16] .400 [10.16] 1.450 [36.83] .855 [21.72] N-SERIES N-SERIES SHOWN WITH LARGE LENS AND PADDLE ACTUATOR SHOWN WITH BARS LENS AND CONNECTOR 1.970 [50.04] 1.020 [25.91] .400 [10.16] .391 [7.62] 2.380 [60.45] N-SERIES N-SERIES LC2-01 BLACK .187 TAB CONNECTOR (PACKARD 480-SERIES) LH1 REMOVABLE HOLE PLUG WITH NON-SERRATED WINGS LH2 HOLE PLUG WITH SERRATED WINGS 1.970 [50.04] 1.020 [25.91] .500 [12.70] .920 [23.37] 1.325 [33.66] 1.710 [43.43] .300 [7.62] .790 [20.07] .855 [21.72] 110 www.carlingtech.com N-Series Addressable Rocker Switches - Circuit Diagrams & Lamp Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagrams: Lamp Circuit Diagrams: SWITCH CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS SWITCH CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS CIRCUIT CODE CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC CODE SCHEMATIC ILLUM. CODE 9 4 P1 P3 R5 9 R3 P1 R4 P3 R1 R2 4 2 R5 8 7 R3 INTERNAL CIRCUIT R4 R1 R2 BOARD (TYPICAL) 2 P1 P3 R5 R3 P1 R4 5 2 R1 R2 P3 7 INTERNAL CIRCUIT BOARD (TYPICAL) R3 R4 R1 R2 1 A 2 (-) 12 (-) 9 (-) 9 (+) 11 (+) 11 B B P2 P3 6 P2 R1 R2 R3P1 R4 P3 R5 2 9 R5 R4 2 8 7 R3 C 1 7 P3 P2 R3 P1 R4 R5 7 C (+) 10 (+) 10 2 (-) 9 (-) 9 8 7 1 1 1 9 (+) 10 R1 R2 P3 2 1 R1 R2 9 P2 2 1 (-) 9 1 P1 2 8 7 9 P1 2 1 (+) 10(-) 12 (-) 9 6 2 (+) 11 (+) 10 1 8 SCHEMATIC (-) 9(+) 11 A 9 R5 ILLUM. SCHEMATIC CODE (-) 9 8 7 9 5 LAMP CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS LAMP CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS R5 R3 R4 (+) 10 R1 R2 (-) 11 2 7 8 2 (-) 11 8 7 2 2 2 2 (+) 12 9 8 P1 P2 P3 8 P2 R3P1 R4 P3 R1 R2 R5 R3 R5 R4 (-) 9 R1 R2 3 2 7 8 2 7 (-) 9 1 3 2 2 1 8 (+) 10 (+) 12 (+) 10 (+) 12 (-) 9 (-) 9(-) 11 (-) 11 1 4 (+) 10 www.carlingtech.com (+) 12 9 4 2 2 1 (+) 12 (+) 10 (+) 12 111 LT-Series Toggle Switches - Introduction LT-Series LT-Series TOGGLE SWITCHES The LT-Series illuminated toggle switches feature up to a three-color lighting sequence from a single lamp. These lighted toggles contain neoprene bushing seals for dust and moisture protection. A variety of circuits and terminations are available. Product Highlights: 1 or 2 Pole Independent or Dependent Illumination Choice of 5 Actuator Styles Up to 3 different colors under a single lens 112 Typical Applications: Marine Transportation www.carlingtech.com LT-Series Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life Electrical Life Operating Temperature 1000V - live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles 50,000 cycles - maintained 25,000 cycles - momentary 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) LT-1561 1 30 1 Base Part Number 2 Actuator Style 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / ILLUMINATION / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 5 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250VAC, 15A 12-28VDC Single Pole Solder Lug .250 Tab QC Screw Terms Wire Leads On-None-Off LT-1510 LT-1511 LT-1514 LT-1515 On-None-(Off) LT-1520 LT-1521 LT-1524 LT-1525 (On)-None-Off LT-1530 LT-1531 LT-1534 LT-1535 On-None-On LT-1540 LT-1541 LT-1544 LT-1545 On-None-(On) LT-1550 LT-1551 LT-1554 LT-1555 On-Off-On LT-1560 LT-1561 LT-1564 LT-1565 On-Off-(On) LT-1570 LT-1571 LT-1574 LT-1575 (On)-Off-(On) LT-1580 LT-1581 LT-1584 LT-1585 Double Pole Solder Lug .250 Tab QC Screw Terms Wire Leads On-None-Off LT-2510 LT-2511 LT-2514 LT-2515 On-None-(Off) LT-2520 LT-2521 LT-2524 LT-2525 (On)-None-Off LT-2530 LT-2531 LT-2534 LT-2535 On-None-On LT-2540 LT-2541 LT-2544 LT-2545 On-None-(On) LT-2550 LT-2551 LT-2554 LT-2555 On-Off-On LT-2560 LT-2561 LT-2564 LT-2565 On-Off-(On) LT-2570 LT-2571 LT-2574 LT-2575 (On)-Off-(On) LT-2580 LT-2581 LT-2584 LT-2585 Snapkap Style 2 5 Bright Chrome 6 Satin Chrome 7 Black Molded 2 ACTUATOR STYLE Paddle 1 1 Clear Paddle 4 Solid Color Paddle Notes: 1 Solid color paddle available with lighting sequence 01, 02, 10 or 20. 2 SnapKap Toggle Lenses are available separately. Consult factory. 3 Independent lamp is standard. Dependent lamp with ON-OFF function (including momentary) is available with Lighting Sequences 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50. (No light in OFF position.) 4 Green and blue not recommended with 125 volt or 250 volt neon lamps. 5 Additional terminations available. Consult factory for details. ( ) Indicates momentary function. 012 3 Lighting Sequence 4 Lamp Voltage 3 LIGHTING SEQUENCE 3,4 position 1 01red 02amber 03green 10 red 11red 12red 13red 14red 15red 20 amber 21amber 22amber 23amber 24amber 25amber 30 green 31green 32green 33green 34green 35green 40 blue 41blue 42blue 43blue 44blue 45blue 50 clear 51clear 52clear 53clear 54clear 55clear .274[6.96] DIA .379[9.63] incandescent 006 6 volt 012 12 volt 018 18 volt 024 24 volt .168[4.27] DIA LENS neon 125N 250N .075[1.91] DIA .330[8.38] 125 volt neon 250 volt neon .055[1.40] DIA .437[11.09] .394[10.00] .250[6.35] .187[4.74] .187[4.74] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP position 3 red amber green none red amber green blue clear none red amber green blue clear none red amber green blue clear none red amber green blue clear none red amber green blue clear 4 LAMP VOLTAGE 4 .125[3.18] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD position 2 red amber green --- clear clear clear clear clear --- clear clear clear clear clear --- clear clear clear clear clear --- clear clear clear clear clear --- clear clear clear clear clear .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG .187 TAB (Q.C.) TERMINAL TYPE .890[22.61] .715[18.16] .865[21.97] #6-32NC-2 THREAD .422[10.72] 6.000[152.40] .370[9.39] .500[12.70] .750[19.05] 1.375[34.92] .286[7.26] 1.088[27.64] SINGLE POLE SNAPKAP TOGGLES 5,6,7 DOUBLE POLE .250[6.35] .270[6.86] .187[4.75] .141[3.58] .187[4.75] .350[8.89] SCREW (ASSEMBLED) WIRE LEAD PRINTED CIRCUIT .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .625[15.87] TOGGLE STYLES 1,4 MOUNTING HOLE Keyway should point down for maximum water resistance .038[9.65] *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 113 F-Series Single Pole Toggle Switches - Introduction F-Series F-Series SINGLE POLE TOGGLE SWITCHES General purpose workhorses with options tailored to meet most any need. Ratings to 20A 277VAC, various actuator, bushing, termination, and circuit choices allow this versatile switch to easily integrate into a variety of different applications. The F-Series is appropriate for usage in low voltage DC applications. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS Product Highlights: Ratings to 20A Suitable for low voltage 12/24V DC Variety of termination options Consult factory for large choice of bushing/toggle length combinations 114 STP Typical Applications: Marine Food Service Generator Industrial Control Office Automation www.carlingtech.com F-Series Single Pole Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life Electrical Life Operating Temperature 1000V - live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles 50,000 cycles - maintained 25,000 cycles - momentary 0°F to 150°F (-17.8°C to +65.6°C) 73 / TABS 2FA54 1 Base Part Number 2 Actuator Style 3 Tab Terminals 2 ACTUATOR STYLE BAT STYLE TOGGLE 2 unsealed sealed 73 78 E3 E8 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 1 10A 250VAC; 15A 125VAC; 3/4 HP 125-250VAC Solder Lug .250 Tab QC Screw Terminals On-None-Off 2FA53 2FA53- . . . /TABS 2FA54 (On)-None-Off 6FA53 6FA53- . . . /TABS 6FA54 On-None-(Off) 6FA57 6FA57- . . . /TABS 6FA58 On-None-On 2FB53 2FB53- . . . /TABS 2FB54 On-None-(On) 6FB53 6FB53- . . . /TABS 6FB54 On-Off-On 2FC53 2FC53- . . . /TABS 2FC54 On-Off-(On) 6FC57 6FC57- . . . /TABS 6FC58 (On)-Off-(On) 6FC53 6FC53- . . . /TABS 6FC54 toggle length 0.687 2.000 bushing length 0.465 0.465 3 TAB TERMINALS /TABS Tab Terminals (blank) Leave blank if tab terminals not required. Additional ratings up to 20A 125VAC, 12A 250VAC, 1HP 120-240 VAC available. Consult factory for specifics. Notes: 1 Consult factory for .187 tab, wire lead and combination screw/tab/solder lug termination callouts. 2 Additional toggle options are available. Consult factory. ( ) indicates momentary function. .075[1.91] DIA .125[3.18] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .330[8.38] .437[11.09] .394[10.00] .250[6.35] .187[4.74] .187[4.74] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP SOLDER LUG .687[17.44] .055[1.40] DIA .250 TAB (Q.C.) .187 TAB (Q.C.) TERMINAL TYPE .465[11.81] #6-32NC-2 THREAD .670[17.02] 6.000[152.40] .141[3.58] .370[9.39] .500[12.70] .286[7.26] .348[8.84] 1.134[28.80] SCREW (ASSEMBLED) .062[1.57] .634[16.10] .500[12.70] DIA .376[9.55] .500[12.70] DIA .038[9.65] MOUNTING HOLE WIRE LEAD WITH KEYWAY .500[12.70] DIA .125[3.17] DIA WITH LOCKING RING *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 115 G-Series Toggle Switches - Introduction G-Series G-Series TOGGLE SWITCHES General purpose workhorses with options tailored to meet most any need. Ratings to 20A 277VAC, international approvals, various actuator, bushing, termination, and circuit choices allow this toggle switch to easily integrate into a variety of different applications. The G-Series is appropriate for usage in low voltage DC applications. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS Product Highlights: Ratings to 20A 277VAC available Metal bat or nylon bat/paddle actuator styles UL, CSA and VDE approvals for select circuits Suitable for low voltage 12/24V DC 116 STP Typical Applications: Marine Food Service Generator Industrial Control Office Automation www.carlingtech.com G-Series Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity Electrical Life 50,000 cycles - maintained 25,000 cycles - momentary Mechanical Life VDE: 4000V - live to dead metal parts; 1250V - opposite polarity & across open contacts 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0° to 85°C) 2GM51 73 1 Base Part Number 2 Actuator Style 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 3 Single Pole in Double Pole base Double Pole 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250VAC solder lug .250 tab screw term. solder lug 2GA50 2GA51 2GA54 On-None-Off 2GK50 6GA5A 6GA5B 6GA5E (On)-None-Off 6GK5A 6GA5L 6GA5M 6GA5S On-None-(Off) 6GK5L 2GB50 2GB51 2GB54 On-None-On 2GL50 6GB5A 6GB5B 6GB5E On-None-(On) 6GL5A 2GC50 2GC51 2GC54 On-Off-On 2GM50 6GC5A 6GC5B 6GC5E On-Off-(On) 6GM5A 6GC5L 6GC5M 6GC5S (On)-Off-(On) 6GM5L 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 12 (6)A 250VAC T85/55 ENEC/VDE Approved 1 2GA90 2GA91 - On-None-Off 2GK90 2GB90 2GB91 - On-None-On 2GL90 2GC90 2GC91 - On-Off-On 2GM90 Additional ratings up to 20A 125VAC, 12A 250VAC, 1HP 120-240 VAC available. Consult factory for specifics. 2 ACTUATOR STYLE 4 unsealed BAT 73 5 PADDLE NBL3 BAT 2 D-3B-B PADDLE 2 - sealed 78 NBL8 - D-4B-B .250 tab 2GK51 6GK5B 6GK5M 2GL51 6GL5B 2GM51 6GM5B 6GM5M screw term. 2GK54 6GK5E 6GK5S 2GL54 6GL5E 2GM54 6GM5E 6GM5S 2GK91 2GL91 2GM91 toggle length 0.687 0.687 0.687 0.687 bushing length 0.465 0.465 0.379 0.379 Notes: 1 Not available with 73 or NBL3 style toggles, T55 with 78 and NBL8 style toggles. 2 All nylon bushing and toggle. 3 Consult factory for .187 tab, wire lead and combination screw/tab/solder lug termination callouts. 4 Additional actuator options available. Consult factory. 5 Nylon toggle with black ebanol plated bushing. ( ) Indicates momentary function. .687[17.44] .075[1.91] DIA .125[3.18] DIA .055[1.40] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .330[8.38] .187[4.74] .465[11.81] .437[11.09] .394[10.00] .250[6.35] .187[4.74] SOLDER LUG .778[19.76] .250 TAB (Q.C.) .187 TAB (Q.C.) TERMINAL TYPE 1.308[33.22] .422[10.72] .750[19.05] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP .778[19.76] #6-32NC-2 THREAD .187[4.75] 6.000[152.40] .141[3.58] .370[9.39] .187[4.75] .500[12.70] .286[7.26] .350[8.89] SCREW (ASSEMBLED) .490[22.86] PRINTED CIRCUIT .376[9.55] WIRE LEAD .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .500[12.70] DIA .500[12.70] DIA .750[19.05] .075[1.905] IEC APPROVED CONSTRUCTION .038[9.65] MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY .125[3.17] DIA WITH LOCKING RING *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 117 H/I-Series Toggle Switches - Introduction H/I-Series H/I-Series TOGGLE SWITCHES General purpose workhorses with options tailored to meet most any need. Ratings to 17A 125VAC, various actuator, bushing, termination, and circuit choices allow this toggle to easily integrate into a variety of different applications. The H/I-Series is appropriate for usage in low voltage DC applications. Product Highlights: Ratings up to 600VAC Available reversing and progressive switch circuits Variety of termination options Consult factory for large choice of bushing/toggle length combinations 118 Typical Applications: Food Service Generator Industrial Control Office Automation www.carlingtech.com H/I-Series Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts Mechanical Life 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0° to 85°C) 50,000 cycles - maintained 25,000 cycles - momentary HK251 73 1 Base Part Number 2 Actuator Style 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 2 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250VAC, 1, 2 or 3 phase Three Pole Four Pole solder .250 tab screw wire solder lug tab term. leads lug HK250 HK251 HK254 HK255 Off-None-On IK250 HK25A HK25B HK25E HK25F Off-None-(On) IK25A HK25L HK25M HK25S HK25S On-None-(Off) IK25L HL250 HL251 HL254 HL25E On-None-On IL250 HL25A HL25B HL25E HL25F On-None-(On) IL25A HM250 HM251 HM254 HM255 On-Off-On IM250 HM25A HM25B HM25E HM25F On-Off-(On) IM25A HM25L HM25M HM25S HM25T (On)-Off-(On) IM25L .250 tab tab IK251 IK25B IK25M IL251 IL25B IM251 IM25B IM25M screw wire term.leads IK254 IK255 IK25E IK25F IK25S IK25T IL254 IL255 IL25E IL25F IM254 IM255 IM25E IM25F IM25S IM25T Additional ratings up to 20A 125VAC, 12A 250VAC, 1HP 120-240 VAC available. Consult factory for specifics. 2 ACTUATOR STYLE 1 unsealed BAT 73 E3 PADDLE3 NBL3 sealed 78 E8 NBL8 toggle length 0.687 2.000 0.687 bushing length 0.465 0.465 0.465 Notes: 1 Additional actuator options available. Consult factory for details. 2 Consult factory for .187 tab and combination screw/tab/solder lug termination callouts. 3 Nylon toggle with black ebanol plated bushing. ( ) Indicates momentary function. .075[1.91] DIA .125[3.18] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .687[17.44] .465[11.81] .803[20.40] .330[8.38] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP 1.308[33.22] .465[11.81] .687[17.44] .803[20.40] 1.308[33.22] .422[10.72] .250[6.35] .187[4.74] .250 TAB (Q.C.) .187 TAB (Q.C.) TERMINAL TYPE 1.088[27.64] NYLON TOGGLE IN 4-POLE BASE .394[10.00] SOLDER LUG 3-POLE KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP .437[11.09] .187[4.74] #6-32NC-2 THREAD .422[10.72] .055[1.40] DIA 6.000[152.40] .141[3.58] .370[9.39] .500[12.70] .286[7.26] .500[12.70] DIA SCREW (ASSEMBLED) .062[1.57] WIRE LEAD .376[9.55] .500[12.70] DIA 1.436[36.47] .500[12.70] DIA .038[9.65] MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY .125[3.17] DIA WITH LOCKING RING *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 119 C-Series Single Pole Toggle Switches - Introduction C-Series C-Series SINGLE POLE TOGGLE SWITCHES The C-Series single pole compact high current toggle switches are ideal for applications with back panel size constraints. These switches feature self-cleaning contacts and ratings up to 20A 125VAC, 10A 250VAC, 1 1/2 HP 125-250VAC. With a rugged metal construction, these switches figure prominently in markets with stringent current carrying requirements. Product Highlights: Ratings to 20A 125VAC and 1.5HP 125-250VAC Compact size Self-cleaning wiping style contacts 4 termination choices 120 Typical Applications: Environmental Controls Marine Food Service Vacuum Cleaners www.carlingtech.com C-Series Single Pole Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life 1000V - live to dead metal parts and opposite polarity. 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 25,000 cycles CA201 1 Base Part Number 73 2 Actuator Style 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 10A 250VAC, 20A 125VAC, 1 1/2 HP 125-250VAC Single Pole Solder Lug .250 Tab Screw Term. Wire Leads On-None-Off CA200 CA201 CA204 CA205 On-None-On CB200 CB201 CB204 CB205 2 ACTUATOR STYLE 1 unsealed BAT 73 sealed 78 toggle length 0.687 bushing length 0.465 Notes: 1 Additional toggle styles available. Consult factory. .125[3.17] DIA .075[1.90] DIA .375[9.52] 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .250[6.35] .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP .687[17.44] .250[6.35] TERMINAL TYPE #6-32NC-2 THREAD .465[11.81] .141[3.58] 6.000[152.40] .370[9.39] .500[12.70] .585[14.86] .286[7.26] SCREW (ASSEMBLED) .312[7.92] .500[12.70] DIA .875[22.22] .062[1.57] .522[13.26] .038[9.65] MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY WIRE LEAD .376[9.55] .500[12.70] DIA .500[12.70] DIA .125[3.17] DIA WITH LOCKING RING *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 121 D-Series Single Pole Toggle Switches - Introduction D-Series D-Series SINGLE POLE TOGGLE SWITCHES The D-Series single pole compact high current toggle switches are ideal for applications with back panel size constraints. These switches feature self-cleaning contacts and ratings up to 20A 125VAC, 10A 250VAC, 1 1/2 HP 125-250VAC. With an economical double insulated all nylon construction, these switches figure prominently in markets with stringent current carrying requirements. Product Highlights: Compact all nylon double insulated construction Ratings to 20A 125VAC, 1.5 HP 125-250VAC Integrated wire lead construction Paddle of Bat style actuators 122 Typical Applications: Environmental Controls Marine Food Service Vacuum Cleaners www.carlingtech.com D-Series Single Pole Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Electrical Life Dielectric Strength 50,000 cycles UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity TUV: 4000V - live to dead metal parts; 750V - across open contacts Mechanical Life 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0° to 85°C) DA221 B P 1 Base Part Number 2 Actuator Style B 3 Actuator Color 4 Bushing Color 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING 1 / TERMINATION 10A 250VAC, 20A 125VAC, 1 1/2 HP 125-250VAC Solder Lug .250 Tab Wire Leads On-None-Off DA220 DA221 DA225 On-None-On DB220 DB221 DB225 On-Off-On DC220 DC221 DC225 5A 250VAC, 10A 125VAC, 1/2 HP 125-250VAC, 4(4) 250VACμ TUV approved Wire Leads On-None-Off DA945 Solder Lugs DA940 2 ACTUATOR STYLE B Bat P Paddle 3 ACTUATOR COLOR 2 B Black W White 4 BUSHING COLOR 2 B Black W White .250 Tabs DA941 Notes: 1 DA945 available with wire leads and ON-OFF circuit only. 2 Additional colors available. Please consult factory. .156[3.96] DIA .069[1.75] DIA 6.000[152.4] .375[9.52] .250[6.35] SOLDER LUG .687[17.44] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP .250[6.35] .500[12.70] INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD (no exposed conductors) .250 TAB (Q.C.) TERMINAL TYPE .280[7.11] .687[17.44] .500[12.70] DIA .376[9.55] .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .375[9.52] .038[9.65] 1.000[25.40] .588[14.93] MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY .500[12.70] DIA .125[3.17] DIA WITH LOCKING RING *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 123 110/216-Series Heavy Action Toggle Switches - Introduction 110/216 110/216-Series HEAVY ACTION TOGGLE SWITCHES The 110/216-Series is a compactly designed, versatile metal construction toggle switch which is appropriate for a variety of uses. Features include single or double pole options, maintained or momentary construction with termination choices including solder lug end or bottom, wire leads and .250 tab terminals. The quick make/quick break contact mechanism makes the switch suitable for high voltage (125-250 volt) applications. Product Highlights: 125/250V AC or DC rated Compact space saving envelope Single or double pole 2 position Maintained or Momentary circuits 124 Typical Applications: Small Appliance Floor Maintenance Lighting www.carlingtech.com 110/216-Series Heavy Action Toggle Switches - General & Dimensional Specifications, Ordering Scheme Dielectric Strength UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity Electrical Life 110-S 1 Base Part Number 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY 1 / RATING / TERMINATION 2 3A 250V, 6A 125V, AC/DC Solder Lug Solder Lug Screw Wire (end) (bottom) Terminals Leads Single Pole On-None-Off 110 110-B 110-S 111-16 Off-None-(On) 110-M-NO 110-BM-NO 110-SM-NO 111-16M-NO On-None-(Off) 110-M-NC 110-BM-NC 110-SM-NC 111-16M-NC Double Pole On-None-Off 2BK62 - - 2BK65 On-None-On 2BL62 - - 2BL65 6A 120VAC Single Pole On-None-On 2BB62 - - - - 112-A 112-M-A - - - 316-B 316-BM - - - - - 216A 216A-M-ANO 216A-M-ANC - 516-B 516-BM - - 516-A 516-AM - - 2BB65 160H-S 160H-A 5A 250V, 10A 125V, 1/4HP, 125V Single Pole On-None-Off 160H 160H-B 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature 0°F to 150°F (-17.8°C to +65.6°C) 25,000 cycles 1A 250V, 3A 125V, AC/DC Single Pole On-None-On 112 On-None-(On) 112-M Double Pole On-None-Off 216 Off-None-(On) 216-M-NO On-None-(Off) 216-M-NC On-None-On 316 On-None-(On) 316-M 2 circuit 1 On - 1 Off 516 1 (On) - 1 (Off) 516-M Mechanical Life 73 2 Actuator Style 2 ACTUATOR STYLE BAT STYLE TOGGLE unsealed sealed 52 57 63 68 73 78 toggle length 0.375 0.500 0.687 bushing length 0.343 0.465 0.46555 BALL STYLE TOGGLE unsealed sealed 21 - 22 - 25 - toggle length 0.375 0.375 0.375 bushing length 0.250 0.343 0.875 Notes: 1 Momentary function only available with 73 toggles. 2 160H and 110-Series are available with .250 tab terminals. Add suffix /TABS to end of part number. ex. 110-73/TABS ( ) Indicates momentary function. .075[1.90] DIA .250[6.35] .093[2.36] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .465[11.81] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP .687[17.46] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP .580[14.73] .293[7.44] .070[1.77] DIA .174[4.42] .120[3.05] .351[8.92] .250 TAB (Q.C.) (SPST only) SOLDER LUG SOLDER LUG (bottom) TERMINAL TYPE .465[11.81] .528[13.41] .984[25.00] 2BL62 SERIES 112, 2BK, 2BL SERIES .687[17.46] .270[6.86] .500[12.70] SCREW (ASSEMBLED) 110 SERIES .524[13.31] INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD (no exposed conductors) .376[9.55] .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .500[12.70] DIA .560[14.22] .890[22.60] 6.000[152.4] .415[10.54] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP .465[11.81] #6-32NC-2 THREAD .038[9.65] MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY .500[12.70] DIA .125[3.17] DIA WITH LOCKING RING *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 125 DK/EK-Series Heavy Duty Toggle Switches - Introduction DK/EK DK/EK-Series HEAVY DUTY TOGGLE SWITCHES The switch that can handle your heavy duty requirements. Single or double pole with wire lead or screw terminations, and ratings to 20A 125V 10A 250V, the ac/dc DK/EK-Series is the most heavy duty toggle switch in the Carling line. Its sturdy metal construction and stiff actuation force will withstand the abuses of virtually any stringent application. The quick make/quick break contact mechanism is ideal for high voltage DC applications. Product Highlights: Ratings up to 20A 125V AC or DC Screw Term or Wire Lead terminations Quick Make / Quick Break contact mechanism Bat or Ball style toggle options 126 Typical Applications: Industrial Motor Control General Purpose www.carlingtech.com DK/EK-Series Heavy Duty Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity Mechanical Life 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature Electrical Life 0°F to 150°F (-17.8°C to +65.6°C) 25,000 cycles DK284 1 Base Part Number 2 ACTUATOR STYLE 1 BAT STYLE TOGGLE unsealed toggle length bushing length 73 0.6870.465 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 8A 250V, 16A 125V, 1 HP 125-250V Screw Terminals Single Pole On-None-Off DA284 Double Pole On-None-Off Wire Leads DK284 EK204 BALL STYLE TOGGLE unsealed toggle length 32 0.500 DA285 DK285 10A 250V, 20A 125V, 1 1/2 HP 125-250V Screw Terminals Single Pole On-None-Off EA204 Double Pole On-None-Off 73 2 Actuator Style bushing length 0.343 Notes: 1 Additional toggle lengths available. Consult factory for details. Wire Leads EA205 EK205 #6-32NC-2 THREAD 6.000[152.40] .270[6.86] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] .465[11.81] 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD (TYP) .500[12.70] .687[17.44] .765[19.43] TERMINAL TYPE DK SERIES .836[21.23] SCREW (ASSEMBLED) WIRE LEAD 1.750[44.45] 1.764[44.80] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .500[12.70] DIA .465[11.81] .038[9.65] .687[17.44] MOUNTING HOLE .500[12.70] DIA .125[3.17] DIA WITH LOCKING RING EK SERIES .895[22.73] 1.000[25.40] WITH KEYWAY .376[9.55] 2.093[53.16] *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 127 MAAOA/215-Series Toggle Switches - Introduction MAAOA/215 MAAOA/215-Series TOGGLE SWITCHES The MAAOA/215-Series toggle switches are single pole, AC rated at 20 amps and 125 VAC. These switches are snap-in mounted, with a phenolic toggle and base, and are suitable for high ambient temperature applications. Product Highlights: High temperature Phenolic base and toggle Ratings to 125VAC Optional embossed On-Off legend Choice of screw, .250 Tab or integrated wire lead connections 128 Typical Applications: Coffee Makers Food Warmers www.carlingtech.com MAAOA/215-Series Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity Mechanical Life 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 25,000 cycles MAAOA 1 Base Part Number BL / ON-OFF 2 Color 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 10A 250 VAC, 20A 125 VAC, 1/2 HP 125-250 VAC .250 Tabs Screw Terms. Wire Leads Single Pole On-Off MAAOA 215 215A (On)-Off MM-021 - - 3 Legend 2 BASE & ACTUATOR COLOR BL Black Brown BN 3 LEGEND 1 On-Off Notes: Panel Cut-Out recommendations: For sheet metal panels, switch must enter panel in same direction as the punch. (Burr on bottom.) Test cut hole in actual material. 1 Imprinting is available. ON-OFF legend is not standard and must be specified after color. If not specified, switch will be manufactured with no legend. ( ) Indicates momentary function. .075[1.90] DIA #6-32NC-2 THREAD 6.000[152.4] .365[9.27] .500[12.70] .250[6.35] .420[10.67] .270[6.86] SCREW (ASSEMBLED) .250 TAB (Q.C.) INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD (no exposed conductors) TERMINAL TYPE 1.218[30.94] .156[3.96] .906[23.01] .656[16.66] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL .379[9.63] MOUNTING HOLE Panel Thickness: .030[.762] min - .090 [2.28] max. Specific cutout dimension range dependent on panel thickness and material. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 129 Toggle Accessories - Protective Hexboot Carling Technologies full or half hexboot is the perfect complement to Carling’s line of toggle switches. The boot is compatible with 15/32” threaded bushings and will provide extra protection against the elements in harsh environments. Product Highlights: Flexible tear-resistant silicone rubber overmolded onto a 15/32” brass hexnut Full hexboot completely covers toggle actuator and bushing Meets ROHS 2011/65/EU directive Inhibits the rotation of switches subjected to low frequency vibration Complementary, cost effective addition to Carling’s toggle switches Suitable for toggle models: F-Series, G-Series, 110-Series, C-Series, D-Series, DK/EK-Series, H/I-Series, LT-Series Full Hexboot Half Hexboot Part #: 999-37246-001 Part #: 999-37245-001 Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Full Hexboot 0.602 0.472 0.256 0.965 0.087 0.104 0.433 0.118 15/32-32NS-2B 0.315 0.063 0.551 0.630 0.65 Half Hexboot 0.43 0.41 0.20 0.04 0.75 130 0.22 0.31 0.47 0.26 0.12 15/32-32NS-2B 0.33 0.10 0.65 www.carlingtech.com Toggle & Pushbutton - Bushing Accessories Bushing Accessories The hardware options and accessories listed below were specifically designed to be used with toggle and pushbutton switches. The drawings are representative of the actual products. When other hardware options are required, please consult factory. .570 [14.47] .555 [14.09] .621 [15.77] KNURLED .070 [1.77] .078 [1.98] .120 [3.04] KNURLED STANDARD HEXNUT STANDARD FACENUT PLASTIC FACENUT .562 in. [14.27 mm] X .076 in. [1.93 mm] NICKEL: 380-08602 BLACK: 380-08606 .570 in. [14.47 mm] X .078 in. [1.98 mm] NICKEL: 380-08693 BLACK: 380-08694 (Wrench Supplied N/C) .625 in. [15.87 mm] X .120 in. [3.04 mm] BLACK: 384-17126-001 RED: 384-17126-002 WHITE: 384-17126-003 .075 [1.90] .636 [16.15] KNURLED .593 - .607 [15.06 - 15.41] .155 [3.93] .722 [18.33] .029 [0.73] min. .031 [0.78] DRESS FACENUT LOCKWASHER LOCKING RING .636 in. [16.15 mm] X .155 in. [3.93 mm] NICKEL: 380-08810 BLACK: 380-08811 NICKEL-PLATED: 728-15907 ZINC: 728-15946 BLACK:728-15947 All indicator plates are nickel-plated steel. Odd keyway locations, alternate imprints and plating available on special order. Contact factory for minimum quantities and specifications. ON HI ON O F F O N OFF YO1 272-06747 LO Y02 272-06764 HIGH OFF OFF Y51 272-06842 Y1O1 272-06935 ON OFF LOW Y311 272-07258 OFF Y500 272-07293 ALL PLATES SHOWN FIT 15/32" ( .465 [11.81]) BUSHINGS www.carlingtech.com 131 16-3P-Series Pushbutton Switches - Introduction 16-3P 16-3P-Series PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES The 16-3P-Series pushbutton switches are single pole and AC rated up to 3 amps. These momentary action switches have a slow-make, slow-break contact mechanism and require only light actuation force (4 oz. - 1 lb.). These switches are typically used in general purpose applications requiring finger actuation. Product Highlights: Maintained, Momentary and 2 circuit function choices Available with optional overtravel plunger action Light 4 oz – 1 lb actuation force Metal plunger available with optional colored plastic cap 132 Typical Applications: Test & Measurement Audio Visual www.carlingtech.com 16-3P-Series Pushbutton Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 25,000 cycles 16-3POFF 1 Base Part Number 4 2 Bushing CBL 3 Actuator Style 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION Single Pole Solder Lug Wire Leads 2 BUSHING STYLE 2 .312 length 4 .562 length 3A 125VAC Off-(On) Off-(On) with overtravel 1 On-(Off) 16-3P Off 16-3AP Off 16-3P Off-Ov 16-3AP Off-Ov 16-3P On 16-3AP On 3 ACTUATOR STYLE 2 CBL black plastic color cap CRD red plastic color cap 1A 125VAC On-On On-On with overtravel 1 1 On-1 Off (2 circuit) 1 On-1 Off with overtravel 1 (2 circuit) 116-P 116-P-OV 516-P 516-P-OV 116-AP 116-AP-OV 516-AP 516-AP-OV Notes: 1 Overtravel only available with #4 bushing. 2 When selection 3 is left blank, a standard nickel plated plunger is supplied. ( ) Indicates momentary function. 6.000[152.4] .080[2.03] DIA .230[5.84] 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .500[12.70] INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD (no exposed conductors) SOLDER LUG .140[3.56] .345[8.76] DIA TERMINAL TYPE .327[8.30] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP .510[12.95] .562[14.27] .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .500[12.70] DIA .478[12.14] .038[9.65] 1.132[28.75] .359[9.12] MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 133 170/172-Series Pushbutton Switches - Introduction 170/172 170/172-Series PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES The 170/172-Series pushbutton switches are single pole, high amperage switches suitable for shallow back panel applications. These switches are momentary action and require an actuation force of 2.5 lbs. The 170/172-Series switches are equipped with a slow-make, slow-break contact mechanism and are rated at 15 amps at 125VAC. Product Highlights: Rated to 15A 125VAC Sturdy metal clad construction Metal plunger available with optional colored plastic cap Momentary On or Momentary Off circuitry Typical Applications: Test & Measurement Meters Horns 134 www.carlingtech.com 170/172-Series Pushbutton Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 25,000 cycles - Momentary CBL 172 1 Base Part Number 2 Cap Style/Color 2 CAP STYLE / COLOR 1 CBL Black Plastic CGN Green Plastic CRD Red Plastic CWH White Plastic 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 10A 250VAC; 15A 125VAC Single Pole Solder Lug Wire Leads Screw Terms. On-(Off) 170-B 170-A 170 Off-(On) 172-B 172-A 172 Notes: 1 When selection 2 is left blank, a standard nickel plated plunger is supplied. ( ) Indicates momentary function. .285[7.24] #6-32NC-2 THREAD .122[3.10] DIA .270[6.86] DIA 6.000[152.40] 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .500[12.70] .140[3.56] .190[4.83] .345[8.76] DIA SCREW (ASSEMBLED) SOLDER LUG KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP WIRE LEAD TERMINAL TYPE .604[15.34] .320[8.13] .240[6.10] 9/16 HEX NUT (1) REQ'D .562[14.27] 170 NICKEL PLATED .500[12.70] DIA 172 MOUNTING HOLE .062[1.57] 1.382[35.10] .576[14.63] .460[11.68] .370[9.40] BINDING HEAD SCREWS .500[12.70] DIA 170 PLASTIC 172 .038[.965] WITH KEYWAY *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 135 P26-Series Pushbutton Switches - Introduction P26-Series P26-Series PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES The P26-Series pushbutton switches are single pole, AC rated for 6 amps at 125 VAC and suitable for shallow back panel applications. These switches are momentary action with a medium actuation force (13 oz. typical). The P26-Series switch is equipped with a slow-make, slow-break contact mechanism. Product Highlights: 6A 125VAC, 3A 277VAC rated Momentary On or Momentary Off circuitry 4 bushing size combinations Round Metal, Concave Metal and Nylon Style Actuators Typical Applications: Intercoms Security System Electronic Signs Marine Lighting 136 www.carlingtech.com P26-Series Pushbutton Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 25,000 cycles P26L 1 Base Part Number 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION Single Pole Solder Lug .250 Tab Wire Leads 3A 250VAC, 6A 125 VAC, 3/4A 125V Off - (On) P26A P26B P26F On - (Off) P26L - P26T 1 3A 277VAC, 6A 125 VAC Off - (On) P267A P267B P267F On - (Off) P267L - P267T Notes: 1 Additional ratings available. Consult factory for details 2 Only available with 1D bushing in .562 length 3 Length is .562 for RND MTL and CON MTL buttoms ( ) Indicates momentary function. 1D 2 Bushing Style SOLDER LUG .248[6.29] DIA diameter .375 .468 .375 .468 3 BUTTON STYLE / COLOR BL Black Nylon RD Red Nylon RND MTL 2 Round Metal 2 CON MTL Concave Metal .293[7.44] .468[11.89] DIA 3 Button Style/Color 2 BUSHING STYLE length 1A .406 1B .406 1C .465 .465 1D 3 .093[2.36] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD BL .075[1.90] DIA 6.000[152.4] .250[6.35] .500[12.70] .351[8.92] INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD (no exposed conductors) .250 TAB (Q.C.) (Momentary ON only) TERMINAL TYPE .250[6.35] .465[11.81] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP .500[12.70] DIA .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .542[13.76] .038[.965] 1.183[30.04] .524[13.30] MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 137 P27-Series Pushbutton Switches - Introduction P27-Series P27-Series PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES The P27-Series pushbutton switches are single pole, AC rated switches suitable for general purpose applications with a shallow back panel. These switches are momentary action with a medium actuation force (26 oz. typical). The P27-Series switch is equipped with a slow-make, slow-break contact mechanism, rated at 6 amps with a nylon concave pushbutton. Product Highlights: Ratings to 6A 125VAC 3A 250VAC Momentary On or Momentary Off circuitry .250 Tab, Solder Lug or Wire Lead terminations Shallow space saving envelope Typical Applications: Intercoms Security System Electronic Signs Marine 138 www.carlingtech.com P27-Series Pushbutton Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts Electrical Life Mechanical Life 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 25,000 cycles P27A 1 Base Part Number 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION Single Pole Solder Lug .250 Tab Wire Leads 3A 250VAC, 6A 125 VAC, 3/4A 125V Off - (On) P27A P27B P27F On - (Off) P27L - P27T BL 2 Button Color 3 BUTTON STYLE / COLOR BL Black RD Red WH White Notes: ( ) Indicates momentary function. .093[2.36] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .293[7.44] SOLDER LUG .468[11.89] DIA .250[6.35] .420[10.67] DIA .562[14.27] .075[1.90] DIA .250[6.35] 6.000[152.4] .500[12.70] .351[8.92] .250 TAB (Q.C.) (Momentary ON only) INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD (no exposed conductors) TERMINAL TYPE KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP .500[12.70] DIA .542[13.76] 1.183[30.04] .524[13.30] MOUNTING HOLE *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 139 641-Series Pushbutton Switches - Introduction 641-Series 641-Series PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES The single, double and triple pole 641-Series represents the most compact offerings of the Carling’s pushbutton switch line. These switches are UL approved and meet ENEC spacing requirements. Additionally, the new 3-pole switch affords the versatility to control an extra function or indicator light. Rugged metal construction, self-cleaning contacts and stiff actuation force (3-3 1/2 lbs. typical) have made these switches ideal for most “foot pedal” type applications. These alternate action switches fit a standard .500” mounting hole with options of solder lug, wire lead and PC terminals. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS Product Highlights: Available in 1-3 poles 3+ lbs. actuation force ideal for Foot pedal applications Solder Lug, Wire Lead or PC Terminal options Self-cleaning wiping style contacts 140 STP Typical Applications: Music Equipment Test & Measurement Devices Audio-Visual Equipment Appliances www.carlingtech.com 641-Series Pushbutton Switches - General Specifications Electrical Rating Dielectric Strength 5A 125VAC, 2A 250VAC Insulation Resistance 50 Megohms 1500V RMS Initial Contact Resistance 10 Milli Ohm max @ 4Vdc Electrical Life 50,000 Cycles Terminals Solder Lug, Wire Leads and PC Mechanical Mechanical Life 100,000 Cycles Environmental Vibration Sinusoidal Mil STD 202G, Method 204D, Test Condition A 0.06DA or 10G’s 10-500Hz Physical Function Circuits Operation Three Pole Single Throw, TPST Three Pole Double Throw, TPDT Alternate Action, Push ON, Push OFF Button Travel 0.19 (4.83mm) Actuation Force 3 to 5 LB, 1360 to 2268 g Base Polyester, PBT Glass Filled Button Brass, Nickel Plated Bushing Brass, Nickel Plated Plunger Brass, Nickel Plated Top Plate Stainless Steel Actuator (Internal) Nylon 6/6 Pin (Internal)1 Nylon 6/6 Driver Cold Rolled Steel Springs Music Wire Movable Contact Copper Terminals Brass (tin plated) ½” Dia. Hole, with and without keyway, or with locking ring Shock MIL-STD 2020G, Method 213B Test Condition K, 30G’s Handling Shock 1 Meter Drop onto Hard Surface, all surfaces and planes Thermal Shock Moisture Resistance MIL-STD 2020G, Method 107G Test Condition A -55 C to 85 C Mounting MIL-STD 2020G, Method 106F 10 25 C to 65 C Cycles 95% RH Safety & Regulation Thermal Cycling 25 Cycles -40 C to 85 C Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0°C to +85°C) Agency UL 61058, EN 61058 (3 Pole Version) UL 1054 (1 & 2 Pole Version) Materials RoHS, REACH *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 141 641-Series Pushbutton Switches - Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications 64111210 1 Part Number 1 PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 1 One Pole Two Pole 2A 250VAC, 5A 125VAC solder lug PC term. wire leads. solder lug PC term. 64111210 64111212 64111215 ON-OFF 64112210 64112212 64111220 64111222 64111225 ON-ON 64112220 64112222 Three Pole wire leads 64112215 64112225 solder lug 64113210 64113220 PC term. 64113212 64113222 wire leads 64113215 64113225 Notes: 1 For 1 and 2 pole only. 3 Pole switches use brass Pin 1 OR 2 POLE SHOWN WITH SOLDER LUG .200[5.08] .500[12.70] .186[4.72] DIA KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP .378[9.60] 6.000[152.40] .396[10.05] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .468[11.90] .094[2.38] .093[2.36] DIA .254[6.45] SOLDER LUG TERMINAL TYPE 1.783[45.29] .500[12.70] DIA .376[9.55] .062[1.57] .560[14.22] 3 POLE SHOWN WITH SOLDER LUG MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY 15/32-32 UNS-2A THREAD .562 .195 9/16 HEX NUT (FURN. ASSEMBLED). 9/16 HEX NUT (FURN. ASSEMBLED). .216 .406 .072 [1.82] X .038 [.965] DP KEYWAY .072 [1.82] X .038 [.965] DP KEYWAY 15/32-32 UNS-2A THREAD WITH LOCKING RING 3 POLE SHOWN WITH PC TERMINAL .406 .378 .562 .500[12.70] DIA .125[3.17] DIA .038[.965] .500[12.70] DIA .670[17.02] WIRE LEAD PC TERMINAL 9/16 HEX NUT (1) REQ'D .562[14.27] .160[4.06] .195 .378 .254 1.020 1.076 .094 .094 .160 .718 .718 NOTES: 1. KEYWAY TOWARD T3 AND 6 FOR ONE AND TWO POLE SWITCHES .800 1.121 .800 2. KEYWAY TOWARD T4 FOR THREE POLE SWITCHES. .272[6.91] TYP 4 OUTSIDE CORNER LOCATIONS T1 Ø .062[1.57] TYP .345[8.76] .276[7.01] TYP 4 OUTSIDE CORNER LOCATIONS T1 Ø .062[1.57] TYP .270[6.86] .282 [7.16] TYP 2 MIDPOINT LOCATIONS .270[6.86] 1 AND 2 POLE PC TERMINAL MOUNTING HOLES 142 .296[4.37] TYP 2 MIDPOINT LOCATIONS 3 POLE PC TERMINAL www.carlingtech.com 110/316P-Series Pushbutton Switches - Introduction 110/316P 110/316P-Series PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES The 110/316P-Series provides a compact yet rugged solution to general purpose switch needs. Alternate action, metal construction and stiff (6-8 lb) actuation force have combined to make this switch a pillar in a variety of markets. This versatile switch is available in maintained and momentary circuits with a variety of termination and rating options. Product Highlights: Ratings to 5A 250V, 10A 125V AC or DC Maintained or momentary circuitry On-Off, On-On and 2 circuit function options Choice of 4 different termination options Typical Applications: Music Industry Audio/Visual Electronic Road Signs www.carlingtech.com 143 110/316P-Series Pushbutton Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 25,000 cycles 110-P 1 Part Number 1 PART NUMBER: SERIES / ACTUATOR / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION solder lug (end) solder lug (bottom) screw terminals wire leads Single Pole 3A 250V, 6A 125V OFF-ON 110-P110-BP110-SP111-16-P OFF-(ON) 110-PM-OFF110-PBM-OFF110-SPM-OFF111-PM-OFF ON-(OFF) 110-PM-ON110-PBM-ON110-SPM-ON111-PM-ON 5A 250V, 10A 125V, 1/4 HP 125V OFF-ON 160H-P160H-BP160H-SP160H-AP 1A 250V, 3A 125V ON-ON 112-P - - 112-PA ON-(ON) 112-PM - - 112-PAM Double Pole 1A 250V, 3A 125V OFF-ON 216-PP - - 216-PPA OFF-(ON)216-PM-OFF - - 216-PAM-OFF ON-(OFF)216-PM-ON - - 216-PAM-ON ON-ON 316-PP 316-B-PP - 316-PPA ON-(ON) 316-PM 316-B-PM - 316-PAM 1 ON - 1 OFF (2 circuit)516-PP - - 516-PPA 1 (ON) - 1 (OFF) (2 circuit) 516-PM - - 516-PAM Notes: ( ) Indicates momentary function. .075[1.90] DIA .250[6.35] .093[2.36] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD KEYWAY SIDE .437[11.09] .293[7.44] .406[10.31] DIA .070[1.77] DIA .174[4.42] .120[3.05] .351[8.92] .250 TAB (Q.C.) (SPST only) SOLDER LUG SOLDER LUG (bottom) TERMINAL TYPE #6-32NC-2 THREAD .270[6.85] .270[6.86] 6.000[152.4] .562[14.27] .080[2.03] DIA .542[13.76] 1.183[30.04] .415[10.54] END TERMINAL .524[13.31] .500[12.70] INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD (no exposed conductors) SCREW (ASSEMBLED) (SPST ONLY) .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .500[12.70] DIA NOTE: .038[9.65] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 144 www.carlingtech.com P-Series Pushbutton Switches - Introduction P-Series P-Series PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES These rugged pushbutton-type switches feature international approvals, ratings to 20A 125VAC and a heavy actuation force (3-5 lbs. typical) which makes this switch ideal for use as a “foot-pedal” switch. The metal bushing and plunger construction enables this alternate action switch to withstand the rigors of most any stringent pushbutton application. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Rugged metal clad construction ideal for foot pedal applications Ratings to 20A 125VAC UL, CSA and TUV approvals Maintained On-Off or On-ON circuitry www.carlingtech.com Vacuum Cleaners 145 P-Series Pushbutton Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength UL/CSA: 1000 - live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity TUV: 4000V - live to dead metal parts; 1250V - opposite polarity across open contacts Electrical Life 50,000 cycles Mechanical Life 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature 0°F to 85°F (32°C to 85°C) PA341 1 Part Number 1 PART NUMBER: SERIES / ACTUATOR / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION .250 Tab Screw Terms. 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4 HP 120-240 VAC 1 On-Off PA341 PA344 On-On PB341 PB344 10A 250VAC, 20A 125VAC, 1 1/2 HP 120-240 VAC 1 On-Off PA301 PA304 On-On PB301 PB304 2 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 10(6)a 250 VACu, T85 On-Off PA951 PA954 Wire Leads PA345 PB345 PA305 PB305 PA955 Notes: 1 Additional ratings available. Consult factory. 2 UL, CSA & TUV approved. .075[1.90] DIA #6-32NC-2 THREAD 6.000[152.4] .365[9.27] 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .270[6.86] .500[12.70] .317[8.05] DIA .250[6.35] .283[7.18] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP SCREW (ASSEMBLED) .250 TAB (Q.C.) INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD (no exposed conductors) TERMINAL TYPE .562[14.27] .500[12.70] DIA .982[24.94] .062[1.57] .038[.965] MOUNTING HOLE 1.125[28.58] .398[10.11] .500[12.70] DIA WITH KEYWAY .602[15.29] *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 146 www.carlingtech.com PP-Series Pushbutton Switches - Introduction PP-Series PP-Series PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES The PP-Series plastic pushbutton switches are heavy duty, single pole switches with wire leads. They are alternate action, available in single throw construction, with AC ratings up to 15 amps. Both bushing and bracket are made out of nylon. These high current switches are popular within the Appliance market. Product Highlights: Typical Applications: Ratings to 15A 125VAC All nylon construction Stiff actuation force suitable for foot pedal applications Integrated wire lead termination Vacuum Cleaners www.carlingtech.com 147 PP-Series Pushbutton Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Mechanical Life Dielectric Strength UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature Electrical Life 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 50,000 cycles PPA525-AC 1 Part Number 1 PART NUMBER: SERIES / ACTUATOR / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION Wire Leads 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4HP 125-250VAC On-Off PPA525-AC 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC On-Off PAA515-AC 6.000[152.40] .375 DIA[Ø9.53] .500[12.70] 16AWG INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD (No Exposed Conductors) .250[6.35] TERMINAL TYPE .250[6.35] TRAVEL .565[14.35] .540[13.72] DIA .550[13.97] DIA .781[19.84] MAX. 1.000[25.4] .776[19.71] 1.120[28.45] .540[13.72] MOUNTING HOLE .610[15.49] FASTENER FASTENER THICKNESS .010 1.308[33.22] OPTIONAL FASTENER *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 148 www.carlingtech.com R135-Series Rotary Switches - Introduction R135-Series R135-Series ROTARY SWITCHES The R135 and R135A-Series rotary switches are single pole, single throw “L” rated up to 3A, feature an ONOFF repeating action, and are available with a nylon actuating knob; nylon snap-in bracket or nickel-plated brass bushing. These switches are typically used to control lighting functions. Product Highlights: 3A 125VAC “L” rating to control lighting Off-On repeating action circuitry Integrated wire lead termination Bushing or snap in mounting styles www.carlingtech.com Typical Applications: Appliance HVAC 149 R135-Series Rotary Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts Electrical Life Mechanical Life 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 100,000 cycles R135-A 1 Base Part Number 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION Wire Leads 1.5A 250 VAC; 3A 125 VAC L; 5A 12 VDC OFF-ON repeating .375 threaded bushing R135 OFF-ON repeating nylon snap-in bezel R135-A BL 2 Knob Color 2 KNOB COLOR 1 BL Black WH White Notes: Standard Wire Leads are 6” long, stripped 1/2” black. If different length required, please specify at the end of the part number. ex. R135-A-BL/20”. Panel Cut-Out Recommendations: For sheet metal panels, switch must enter panel in same direction as the punch. Burr on bottom. Test cut hole in actual material. 1 Custom colors available. Consult factory. .500[12.70] DIA .700[17.78] DIA OFF .718[18.23] .500[12.70] ON ON NYLON BEZEL MOUNTING HOLE Snaps into .500[12.70] Dia. hole Panel Thickness: .020[.508] to .078[1.98] .600[15.24] .375[9.52] DIA ROTATION .265[6.73] 6.000[152.40] OFF THREADED BUSHING MOUNTING HOLE Fits into .375[9.52] Dia. hole Bushing Length: .312[7.92] *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 150 www.carlingtech.com 700/800-Series Rotary Switches - Introduction 700/800 700/800-Series ROTARY SWITCHES The 700 and 800-Series are single pole multi-position, general purpose rotary switches. These switches feature a nylon actuator in a metal clad construction along with a self-cleaning silver plated contact design. The 700 and 800-Series are typically used in applications requiring multi-position speed controls, such as electric fans. Product Highlights: Ratings to 3A 250VAC, 6A 125VAC Up to 8 available detent positions Double “D” bushing mount Sturdy metal clad construction Typical Applications: Small Appliance Industrial Control Marine www.carlingtech.com 151 700/800-Series Rotary Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Base Material Insulation Resistance Actuator Material UL/CSA: 1000V (minimum) Steel/Zinc Plate Brass/Nickel Plate 100 Megohms (minimum) 700-1A BL 1 Base Part Number 2 Knob Color 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY 1 / RATING / TERMINATION 2 2A 250VAC; 4A 125VAC; 1A 125V Solder Lugs .250 Tabs Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Position 4 - 700-A OFF ON ON ON 700-1 700-1A OFF ON - 700-2 700-2A OFF ON ON ON repeating for 8 positions 700-3 700-3A OFF ON ON OFF 700-4 700-4A OFF ON ON 700-5 700-5A OFF ON OFF 700-6 700-6A - ON OFF ON 700-7 700-7A - ON ON 700-8 700-8A - ON ON ON 700-9 700-9A OFF ON OFF ON 3A 250VAC; 6A 125VAC Switch Positions OFF Position 800-2 2 positions 800-A 1st position 800-3 3 positions 800-A2 2nd position 800-4 4 positions 800-A3 3rd position 800-5 5 positions 800-A4 4th position 800-6 6 positions 800-A5 5th position 800-7 7 positions 800-A6 6th position 800-8 8 positions 800-A7 7th position 800-A8 8th position 700 SERIES 2 ACTUATOR COLOR BL Black Notes: 1 700-2 and 700-2A feature 8 detent positions. 2 800-Series terminal is a combination solder lug and quick connect. POSITION 1 POSITION 2 45 TYP .281 [7.13] ACTUATOR KNOB .075 [1.90] DIA .475 [12.06] .093 [2.36] DIA .475 [12.07] .700 [17.78] DIA .330 [8.38] 1.125 [28.57] DIA POSITION 3 .187 [4.75] .250 [6.35] .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG 1.150 [29.21] TERMINAL TYPE POSITION 4 .372 [9.44] .468 [11.88] 1.537 [39.04] .450 [11.43] MOUNTING HOLES POSITION 7 800 SERIES POSITION 6 45 TYP .072 [1.83] DIA .281 [7.13] .390 [9.90] .355 [9.02] .188 [4.78] POSITION 8 .125 [3.18] .468 [11.88] DIA SOLDER LUG TERMINAL TYPE 1 POSITION 1 POSITION 5 .468 [11.88] DIA 1.125 [28.57] DIA POSITION 4 POSITION 2 .468 [11.88] .372 [9.44] POSITION 3 1.417 [35.99] Notes: 1. Terminal is combination solder lug and quick connect. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 152 www.carlingtech.com Terminology, Agency Approvals Terminology Agency data UL File #E7560 CSA File # LR9280 Single Pole (SP) A switch device that opens, closes or changes connection of a single conductor in an electrical circuit. Double Pole (DP) A switch device that opens, closes or changes connection of two conductors in an electrical circuit. Single Throw (ST) A switch that opens, closes or completes a circuit at only one of the extreme positions of its actuator. Double Throw (DT) A switch that opens, closes or completes a circuit at both extreme positions of its actuator. Normally Open (NO) A momentary switch where one or more circuits are open when the switch actuator is at rest (the normal position.) Normally Closed (NC) A momentary switch where one or more circuits are closed when the switch actuator is at rest (the normal position.) Power Rating A switches current handling capability measured in amperes, horsepower, lamp loads or combinations thereof, in conjunction with applicable voltage levels. L Rating Denotes the ability of a switch to handle the initial high inrush of a Tungsten Filament Lamp on AC voltage only. T Rating Denotes the ability of a switch to handle the initial high inrush of a tungsten filament lamp on AC or DC voltage. Typical European Rating 16 resistive load amperage (4) motor load amperage Aamperage 250Vvoltage ~AC T85 max. operating temp. in centigrade μ micro-gap (<3mm) approved Microgap (μ) European marking required for contact separation of less than 3mm. Switches with microgap (μ) approval are not acceptable as the safety disconnect of equipment from the main power source. The equipment requires an additional means for safe disconnection from the main power source such as a cord and plug. Bulb Life Neon 25,000 hours Incandescent 25,000+ hours LED 100,000 hours Lamp Characteristics Neon (120-240V) .002A Current Draw Incandescent 6V .20A Current Draw 12-14V .08A Current Draw 18V .04A Current Draw 24-28V .04A Current Draw www.carlingtech.com Agency Approvals These marks are granted by national certification bodies for use on products which comply with their specifications. Agency Country UL USA UL Canada UL USA & Canada BEAB United Kingdom CSA Canada VDE Germany TUV Germany SEMKO Sweden NEMKO Norway KEMA Netherlands DEMKO Denmark UTE(USE) France SEV Switzerland OVE Austria IMQ Italy CCC China FIMKO Finland Mark Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 154 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 155 Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 156 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 157 Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 158 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 159 Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 160 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 161 Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 162 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 163 Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 164 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 165 Carling Technologies Catalogs There are several catalogs available featuring complete details on all Carling Technologies products. Below is a list of useful information such as catalogs, brochures and videos. Please visit our website at carlingtech.com or scan the QR codes below for complete details. www.carlingtech.com Watch Company Profile Video Switches & Controls Hydraulic-Magnetic SWITCHES & CONTROLS Rocker, Toggle, Pushbutton & Rotary CATALOG Circuit Protection catalog Complete line and ordering details for Switches & Control products including Rocker, Toggle, Pushbutton, and Rotary style switches. Complete line and ordering details for all hydraulic-magnetic circuit breakers. Thermal GFCI / ELCI GFCI / ELCI THERMAL Circuit Protection Circuit Protection CATALOG catalog Complete line and ordering details for all thermal circuit breakers. 166 CATALOG catalog CATALOG catalog Complete line and ordering details for all GFCIs/ELCIs. www.carlingtech.com Carling Technologies Catalogs Marine On-Off Highway MARINE ON/OFF HIGHWAY Switches, Circuit Protection & ELCI/GFCIs Switches & Controls catalog brochure catalog brochure Complete line of ELCIs, thermal and hydraulic-magnetic circuit breakers specific for marine applications. Complete line of switches, controls and custom solutions specific for on-off highway applications. Renewable Energy Military MILITARY RENEWABLE ENERGY Circuit Breakers & Disconnects COTS Switches & Circuit Breakers catalog brochure catalog brochure Complete line of circuit breakers and disconnect products specific for renewable energy applications. Complete line of COTS (Commercial-Off-The-Shelf) switches and circuit breakers specific for military applications. Telecom/Datacom Industrial Automation TELECOM/DATACOM INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION AND CONTROLS Circuit Protection Circuit Protection & Switches catalog brochure Complete line of hydraulic-magnetic circuit breakers specific for telecom/datacom applications. www.carlingtech.com brochure Complete line of switches and circuit breakers specific for industrial automation & controls applications. 167 Notes 168 www.carlingtech.com Reps & Contact Authorized Sales Representatives Click on the group name on the map below to find your local representative or visit www.carlingtech.com/findarep. « « Matera W. Canada Matera E. Canada MIDWEST DM Michigan TEMCO Northwest WA ND Alaska, Hawaii « Sierra MI ID WY Bridge Marketing WEST IA NE Omega Limited NV UT CA Melody Emery WI MN SD OR NORTHERN Hanna Lind Ltd. MT AZ NM IL KS CO OK AR South America Mexico « « Norris RI PA Pacent TSI North TSI NC SC Sunbelt Components AL SOUTHEAST GA LA ProRep Solutions LATIN AMERICA Americas WV NH NY MA CT Pinnacle Marketing MS DM Mexico LD. Allen NJ DE MD VA TN TX Matrix DM Assoc East DM OH Assoc KY MO Luscombe Engineering Signal Enterprises IN Dy-tronix Inc. ME VT FL Europe Middle East Africa Asia-Pacific Oceania About Carling Founded in 1920, Carling Technologies is a leading manufacturer of electrical and electronic switches and assemblies, circuit breakers, electronic controls, power distribution units, and multiplexed power distribution systems. With four ISO registered manufacturing facilities and technical sales offices worldwide, Carling Technologies Sales, Service and Engineering teams do much more than manufacture electrical components, they engineer powerful solutions! To learn more about Carling please visit www.carlingtech.com/company-profile. To view all of Carling’s environmental, quality, health & safety certifications please visit www.carlingtech.com/environmental-certifications www.carlingtech.com 169 Worldwide Headquarters Carling Technologies, Inc. 60 Johnson Avenue, Plainville, CT 06062-1177 Phone: 860.793.9281 Fax: 860.793.9231 Email: sales@ carlingtech.com www.carlingtech.com Northern Region Sales Office: nrsm@ carlingtech.com Southeast Region Sales Office: sersm@ carlingtech.com Midwest Region Sales Office: mrsm@ carlingtech.com West Region Sales Office: wrsm@ carlingtech.com Latin America Sales Office: larsm@ carlingtech.com Asia-Pacific Headquarters Carling Technologies, Asia-Pacific Ltd., Kowloon, Hong Kong Phone: Int + 852-2737-2277 Fax: Int + 852-2736-9332 Email: sales@ carlingtech.com.hk Shenzhen, China: shenzhen@ carlingtech.com Shanghai, China: shanghai@ carlingtech.com Pune, India: india@ carlingtech.com Kaohsiung, Taiwan: taiwan@ carlingtech.com Yokohama, Japan: japan@ carlingtech.com Europe | Middle East | Africa Headquarters Carling Technologies LTD 4 Airport Business Park, Exeter Airport, Clyst Honiton, Exeter, Devon, EX5 2UL, UK Phone: Int + 44 1392.364422 Fax: Int + 44 1392.364477 Email: ltd.sales@ carlingtech.com Germany: gmbh@ carlingtech.com France: sas@ carlingtech.com SW-C_06_2016